JP7172073B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that allows a prize to be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result that allows winning when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a manner notification means capable of executing a manner notification regarding the operation manner including the first stop operation manner and the second stop operation manner by a predetermined notification means,
providing a normal mode and a specific mode in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is easier to execute than in the normal mode ,
Further, a first special state and a second special state are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will result in a predetermined replay result is higher than in the normal game state and the number of executable games is different,
means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of the specific mode based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
terminating means for terminating the specific mode when a predetermined condition for forced termination is satisfied in the specific mode ;
a remaining number grasping means for grasping information corresponding to the remaining number when the specific mode is ended by the ending means;
means capable of shifting to the first special state when the information grasped by the remaining quantity grasping means is the first information;
means capable of shifting to the second special state when the information grasped by the remaining number grasping means is second information different from the first information;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of each state; 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for addition information. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining main results of a lottery related to an instruction function and setting differences between winning probabilities; It is a figure which shows an example of the mode lottery table for display mode transition. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; It is a figure which shows an example of a lottery table of the number of additional games. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display; It is a figure which shows an example of a back-up lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition alerting|reporting timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for notification of a transition opportunity. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuous production. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 4th RT states. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT game number setting process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing fixed RT processing. It is a flow chart which shows fixed RT state information processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 4 is a timing chart showing the relationship between AT mode and RT state; 4 is a timing chart showing the relationship between AT mode and RT state; 4 is a timing chart showing the relationship between AT mode and RT state; 9 is a timing chart showing the relationship between AT mode and RT state in modification 1. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing the relationship between AT mode and RT state; It is a flow chart which shows fixed RT state information processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 10A is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit, and FIG. 11B is a timing chart showing RT state end timing according to transition timing to fixed RT state in Modified Example 2. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing processing for notification of post-boarding in Modification 3. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing fixed RT processing. It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a freeze timing table; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for freezing. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a freeze effect; FIG. In Modified Example 4, (a) is a flowchart showing a fixed RT game number setting process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a fixed RT game number table. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a process of starting to count the number of AT mode continuations in Modification 5; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship between states in modification 6; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. 4 is a timing chart showing the relationship between AT mode and RT state; 20 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state in Modification 7. FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; 10 is a flowchart showing fixed RT processing. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship between states in modification 8; 10 is a flowchart showing fixed RT processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT mode game number addition processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing fixed RT processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a fixed RT state game number table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a prize mode, the privilege provided, and a part of lottery table. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT game number setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a part of pushing process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given, and the order of operation of the stop switches and the winning mode established in Modified Example 1; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the lottery table for each RT state in modification 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a prize mode, a privilege to be given, and a part of a lottery table in the third embodiment; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a fixed number of games setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a part of pushing process. 4 is a timing chart showing the relationship between AT mode and RT state; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an additional lottery table in modification 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; In Modified Example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the second special winning process, (b) is a flowchart showing part of the number-of-games management process, and (c) is an AT mode and RT state. It is a timing chart showing the relationship. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a part of the pressing order notification process in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a part of production|presentation setting processing at the time of all stop. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between specific production, AT mode, and RT state. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the specific effect, the AT mode and the RT state in the modified example.

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). 3rd), “second replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and "young man" symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as effective lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as valid lines. In the following, a game that starts with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game that starts with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 41st small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. When it stops, it becomes the 1st minor winning combination. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 26th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. "White BAR" pattern, "Red 7" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "White Bell" pattern or "LUCKY" pattern, right reel 32R "White BAR" pattern, "Youth" pattern, "White Bell" pattern, A "red 7" symbol or a "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. If you do, you will win the 8th minor role. As shown in FIG. 6, the middle reel 32M has a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol at a position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 12), and the right reel 32R has: A "red bell" design is arranged at a position (20th) separated by one design upstream from the "white BAR" design (18th). Therefore, when the eighth minor win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor combination is a combination in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, "Cherry" on the left reel 32L. The 27th minor winning prize is established when the symbol stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L is up or stopped. By stopping, the 27th minor winning combination is established. When the 27th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbols stop together on the lower right line L4. More specifically, "cherry" symbols or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols, "white bell" symbols or "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th minor winning combination is won. When the 28th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is established, the 28th minor winning combination may be established instead of the 27th minor winning combination depending on the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode of winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode of winning the 28th minor role, the 27th minor role winning and the 28th minor role winning are clearly distinguished and determined. is done.

The 29th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is the effective line, the 29th minor winning combination is established by stopping all the "watermelon" symbols downward-sloping. When the 29th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 30th small Awarded for the role. When the 30th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and stop on the active line, the 31st minor winning combination is won. When the 31st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th minor wins, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 36th minor winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

A "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "black BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small winning combination is won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and a "second replay" symbol are arranged at a downstream adjacent position (No. 6). "Bell" symbols (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) and "1st replay" symbols are arranged at adjacent downstream positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side are "1st A "replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern is arranged, and a "first replay" pattern is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" pattern (10th) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, mainly the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are tense on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is displayed. "Bell" symbols and "Replay" symbols do not stop, which is a so-called double-tenpai-out stop result. When the 37th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the active line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper and lower stages, and the 38th minor winning combination is established, the left A "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 39th minor role. The 39th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 39th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 40th minor role. The 40th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small Awarded for the role. When the 41st minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, when the 11th re-game win or the 12th re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the 4th RT state.

State transition winnings in which only game state transition is performed include 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning and CB winning.

When the "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the first BB wins, and when the "white BAR" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. , it will be the 2nd BB prize. When these BB prizes are established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Also, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern, a "first replay" pattern, and a "black BAR". When the symbols and stop on the active line, the CB prize is won. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop outcome in which the game state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" pattern or a "white bell" pattern, and the middle reel 32M has a "white BAR" pattern, a "LUCKY" pattern, a "red 7" pattern, a "white bell" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, and the right reel 32R has a "white BAR" pattern, a "young man" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. , “red 7” symbols, and “second replay” symbols stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 having an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination, is provided. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are provided via an input/output port 104. connected.

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the input side of which is connected to the main control device 101, and the output side of which the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66). The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, processing is performed to automatically insert 3 virtual medals, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, 1 coin is executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers in the 4RT state and BB state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such shift notification processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets for which affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S208. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. The slot machine 10 has seven types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. A table is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. Then, when the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not any of the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV=34 to 54) including any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. When an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a process of setting corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a is performed in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a is set. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag and the 33rd minor winning winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set a minor winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=17, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st minor wins have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

It should be noted that in steps S306 to S308 in a state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1BB, 2BB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor combination winning flag is not set. , the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag and the 35th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=35 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 28th minor winning flag and the 33rd winning flag are not set. A small win flag and a 35th minor win win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV should be set so as not to win the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S309, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 218. 1. The probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=19) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=20) is about 252. 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, and sandwich push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 23 to 26) are about 1/43.7, middle push bell The probability of winning 1, middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=27 to 30) is about 1/21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is About 1/21800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV=36) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV=37 The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is about 1/65500, the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is It is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, and chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=42 to 45) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=46, 47) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning the special rep A duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning the special rep AB duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the special rep A duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning the special rep AB duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the 1st BB and the 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV=52, 53) is about 1/32800, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=54) is about 1/19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/1.96.

Note that 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 14, 31 to 33, and 55 to 58 in the lottery table for the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S312, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winning when IV=15) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination are displayed on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are set to stop symbol information. In addition, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won (winning when IV=34) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1 BB winning flag are set, the 28th minor winning combination, the 33rd minor winning combination, the 35th minor winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination are set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination and the 1BB winning is set, the 28th is selected rather than the 1BB winning. The order of priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are preferentially established. In addition, when special reply A duplication 1 is won and stop pattern information corresponding to the 9th replay and 1BB win is set, the 9th replay win is established with priority over the 1BB win. set the priority so that Then, for example, in a situation where the 1BB win is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1BB win and the 1st replay win is set, then the 1BB win is higher than the 1BB win. The order of priority is set so that 1 re-game winning is preferentially established.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Further, when a plurality of minor winning combinations or multiple replays are won in duplicate, which symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination or replay is stopped on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st minor wins is set, as described above, the left The target symbol of the reel 32L is commonly the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which minor win is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols for the 30th minor winning combination, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols for the middle reel 32M for the 41st minor winning combination. , the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the fourth "watermelon" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, the 30th Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. becomes. In this case, in the present embodiment, stop symbol information is set so that a symbol with a small number of slips is preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor winning combination is not established, and the 30th minor winning combination becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stopping operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the eighth "black BAR" symbol to the twelfth "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage, the target for the 41st minor winning combination Both the 8th "black BAR" and 11th "cherry" symbols, which are symbols, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor combination, should be stopped in the middle stage. becomes possible. In this case as well, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the smaller number of slips is preferentially stopped, so the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, and the second symbol stops. The 30th minor winning combination is no longer established, and the 41st minor winning combination becomes possible.

The same applies to the right reel 32R. Depending on the timing at which the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "red bell" symbol that is the target symbol for the 30th minor win and the "watermelon" symbol that is the target symbol for the 41st minor win. The stop pattern information is set so that the pattern with a smaller number of slips is stopped on the lower stage, which is the effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the sixth "first replay" symbol and the seventh "black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed. Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped.

After executing the process of step S315, after executing the section display first process in step S316, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=23 to 30, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the 2nd minor winning prize, the 7th minor winning prize or the 9th minor winning prize is established. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd small winning combination and the 7th small winning combination are set. The stop information is set so that the winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor symbol and also function as the ninth minor symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (between the seventh minor combination symbols, between the ninth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle row, number 7 "red bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the upper row. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination, or the ninth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" pattern is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. A "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol or the ninth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the None of the ninth minor winning symbols stop on the active line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 13th "first replay" pattern to the 17th "first replay" pattern reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "white BAR" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the ninth “second replay” symbol to the thirteenth “first replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. , the seventh minor winning symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the 7th minor winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" pattern to the 10th "young man" pattern reaches the lower row, the 9th minor winning pattern "cherry" pattern is in the middle row. to stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second, seventh and ninth minor symbol symbols are displayed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the 2nd "LUCKY" pattern or the 6th "white bell" pattern stops in the middle stage.

When the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the seventh minor combination winning can be established.

The seventh minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" pattern is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "first replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in , the seventh minor winning symbol "white bell" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the seventh minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "second replay" symbol No. 3 reaches the lower stage, the "watermelon" symbol No. 4 is displayed as shown in FIG. Stop downstairs. The combination of "red bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the ninth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the ninth minor combination winning can be established.

The ninth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. A "young man" symbol is arranged at the 15th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 11th "first replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the ninth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "young man" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. A "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the second minor winning symbol " White BAR” pattern stops at the bottom. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of "white bell" pattern ("red bell" pattern), "LUCKY" pattern ("white bell" pattern), and "watermelon" pattern ("first replay" pattern) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a result.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 7th minor winning combination are established. It is one of a case where a prize is established, a case where a ninth minor winning combination is established, and a case where the transition rolls are stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

A "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged on the right reel 32R such that an interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established or the transitional number will stop on the effective line. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins are established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins are established, the re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , to end the medal payout process. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the game state is the fourth RT state by confirming whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM106. If it is in the fourth RT state, the process advances to step S502 to perform subtraction processing of the number of fixed RT games. Although a detailed description will be given later, the fourth RT state is an RT state in which the number of executable games is predetermined, and the process of step S502 is a process for subtracting the remaining number of executable games. be. In subsequent step S503, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining executable games in the fourth RT state has become 0 based on the processing result of step S502. If it becomes 0, the process of clearing the fourth RT setting flag is executed in step S504, and then the RT state process is terminated. By performing the process of step S504, the game state shifts to the normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S503, the RT state processing is terminated. In this case, the fourth RT state continues.

If a negative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S505 whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the active line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S506, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S507. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S505 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S508, and the second replay winning is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. If the second replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S507. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the transition rolls stop on the activated line under a game state other than the fourth RT state and the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509. , the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, and the process ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22 , when IV=1 is won, normal replay is won, and when IV=2 is won, first promotion replay 1 is won, and IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If you do, you will win the first promotion replay 4. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation sequences. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S508 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S510, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S511, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, and this processing ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When the second RT state lottery table is compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22), the point values PV for IV=1 to 10, 13, and 14 are different, and the other index values IV are the same. point value PV is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=11, 12, 15 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/13.2 when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/15.5. , IV=9 and 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/8.90. The probability of winning when IV=13 is about 1/6.90, and the probability of winning when IV=14 is about 1/131. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning The winning, the 11th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning that shift to the 4th RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command even when winning the 2 promotion replay 2, transition replay 1 and transition replay 2.例文帳に追加

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

Incidentally, the number attached to the fourth replay in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay win is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination of loose stitches, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination of red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a loose eye stops and the fourth replay win is established, or the red 7・The red 7 and black BAR middle stop symbol combination is stopped, and the 4th replay win is established.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(d), when transition replays 1 and 2 are won, the first replay win, second replay win, And the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize is established. That is, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, whether the first re-game win is established and the game state does not shift, or the second re-game win is established and the shift to the first RT state occurs. , the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning is established and the transition to the 4th RT state occurs.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S510 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S513, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S514, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S515. and terminate this process.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S515, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24), the lottery table for the 3rd RT state has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=1-8, 13-58 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV=9, 10 , and the probability of winning at IV=11 and 12 is about 1/7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 11th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning that shifts to the 4th RT state. In addition to , the 6th re-game winning, 7th re-game winning, 8th re-game winning in which the game state does not shift, and the 3rd re-game winning in which the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even when BAR replay 1 and BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the seventh replay winning prize, or the third replay winning prize. is always established. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the eighth replay winning prize, and the third replay winning prize. is always established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S513 that the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S516, and the winning prize set in the previous payout determination processing Based on the established hand, it is determined whether or not the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize has been established. When neither the 11th re-game winning nor the 12th re-game winning has been established, the RT state processing is terminated as it is. When the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S517, and the 4th RT setting flag is set in step S518. Then, in step S519, fixed RT game number setting processing is executed, and then this processing ends. Step S519 is processing for setting the number of games that can be executed in the fourth RT state, and this processing will be described in detail later along with the description of the fourth RT state.

As described above, by the RT state processing, transitions among the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state and the fourth RT state are performed. FIG. 26 collectively shows the presence or absence of transitions between states, along with the transition triggers and termination triggers for each state.

If the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the 1st RT state, the probability of winning any replay except for IV = 48 to 51 (Special A duplicate 1 etc.) that will be duplicated with the bonus (in the following explanation, (also referred to simply as the "replay probability") is about 1 in 7.30. On the other hand, in the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state, the replay probability is about 1/1.53, and it is possible to play the game while suppressing the reduction of the medals held, which is more convenient for the player than in the normal game state and the 1st RT state. be in an advantageous position. The state is shifted from the normal game state to the first RT state by stopping the transition roll, and the state is shifted to the second RT state by winning the third regame. In the second RT state, when the second re-game winning is established, the state is shifted to the first RT state, and basically, the state stays in the normal game state and the first RT state in the normal time.

In the second RT state and the third RT state, the RT state continues until the second regame winning is established. The configuration for preventing the establishment of the second re-game winning will be described later, but the number of staying games in the second RT state and the third RT state is variable as the number of games until the second re-game winning is established. Therefore, these second and third RT states are also referred to as infinite RT states. On the other hand, the fourth RT state, which is shifted by the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning, is a fixed type where the number of staying games is 50 games or 200 games, and is also called a fixed RT state.

In the following description, the normal game state and the first RT state will be referred to as normal RT state for comparison with the infinite RT state and fixed RT state. In addition, in order to make it easier to understand that the replay probability is higher in the infinite RT state and the fixed RT state than in the normal RT state, the infinite RT state and the fixed RT state are collectively referred to as the high RT state, and the normal RT state is the low RT state. Also called

Incidentally, the first RT state is also included in the infinite RT state because the number of games in which it stays is variable.

Normal RT state and infinite RT state (normal game state, 1st RT state to 3rd RT state), while it is possible to move from the staying state to another infinite RT state, in the fixed RT state (4th RT state) , the transition to the infinite RT state is disabled. In addition, the transition to the fixed RT state (4th RT state) does not occur in the normal RT state (normal gaming state, 1st RT state), but is set so that it can occur in the infinite RT state (2nd RT state, 3rd RT state) It is

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

"Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols or "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

At step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 52, and "16384" is set as the point value for IV=55 to 58. is set (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV=55) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 2 (IV=56 The probability of winning at the time of ) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium role 3 (the probability of winning at IV = 57) is about 1/4.00, and the CB The probability of winning the small and medium combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=58) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 28(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination will be won. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded when the 1st minor winning combination, 27th minor winning combination, 31st minor winning combination, 36th minor winning combination to 38th minor winning combination are established. When the payout is performed and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, the 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, and the 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning are established, 14 sheets Medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables the execution of one game (JAC game) as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ) may be provided.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established.

Then, when any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

FIG. 29 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state transitioning to the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1-30 and 34-58, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=31-33. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1/1.11, and the probability of winning the second role in BB (IV = 32) is about 1/20.0, and the probability of winning the 3rd role in BB (probability of winning when IV=33) is about 1/20.0. becomes. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 65500.

The winning probabilities of the 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand and the 3rd BB hand are the winning probabilities common to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. In addition, the winning probabilities of the 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand, and the 3rd BB hand are common winning probabilities regardless of the timing of the transition to the BB state of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. The probability of winning the 3rd role in BB in the 1st BB based on 1 win in the special reply A and the 3rd role in BB in the 1 BB based on 1 win in the special reply AB is the same probability. That is, in any BB state, the lottery processing is performed with reference to the common BB state lottery table.

FIG. 28(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the 1st role in the BB is won, any of the 1st minor role winning, 39th minor role winning, or 40th minor role winning will be awarded regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. It will definitely come true. In addition, the ninth regame winning is also a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, when the second winning combination in the BB is won, the ninth re-game win is always established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

In the 3rd combination of BB, in which the 9th re-game win and the 10th re-game win are possible, which re-game win is established depends on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. When the stop operation is performed, if all of them can win a prize, stop drive control is performed so that the replay with a smaller number of slips wins a prize. More specifically, the combination of symbols for winning the ninth replay and tenth replay is common to both the "first replay" symbol and the "second replay" symbol for both the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. However, the left reel 32L is different. That is, on the left reel 32L, the target symbols for the ninth replay are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, while the target symbols for the tenth replay are the "youth" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. .

For example, in a 3-bet game, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the fourth "cherry" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the upper row, the ninth replay is performed. Both the seventh "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol, and the eighth "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol of the tenth replay, can be stopped at the upper stage on the activated line. In this case, stop drive control is performed so as to stop the 7th "red bell" symbol with a small number of slips on the upper stage. As a result, the ninth re-game win can be established instead of the tenth re-game win. In addition, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 12th "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage on the left reel 32L, the 13th "youth The ninth re-game is set so that the ninth re-game is more likely to win than the 10th re-game, for example, the 12th 'white bell' symbol is driven and controlled to stop at the upper stage instead of the ' symbol. In other words, if the 10th replay is to be won, the 0th "Youth" symbol, the 8th "Watermelon" symbol, and the 13th "Youth" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform the stop operation of the stop switch 42, and if it is other timing, the ninth regame winning will be established.

Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, the 1st winning combination is won in the BB, and if the 1st minor winning combination, the 39th minor winning combination, and the 40th minor winning combination are established, 9 medals are paid out. . Also, when the second combination is won during BB, the ninth re-game winning is established, and even when the third combination during BB is won, the ninth re-game winning is often established. In other words, in the BB state, either the bell winning such as the first small winning combination or the replay winning such as the ninth replay is frequently established. When a replay win is established, no medals are paid out, but a replay is given, and the next game can be played without medals. Since the probability of being out in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a game state in which 9 medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and none of the BB winnings have been established, processing for setting a carryover command is performed in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it known that the bonus winning has not been established in the bonus winning game and a so-called carry-over state has occurred, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

As already explained, winning other bonuses is restricted in games played in the carryover state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), if a winning combination with a bonus of IV=34 to 51 (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) is won, the bonuses corresponding to these bonuses are selected. Winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning a small combination of IV = 34 to 51 or a duplicate combination with a replay, the winning flag for each small combination or replay is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is set. It is not set, and only small wins are valid. In other words, the carry-over state can also be said to be a state in which bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. Note that the end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the 1st BB prize is established under the 2nd RT state, the normal game state is entered. When transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 (=9×24-3×24) medals until the BB state ends.

Incidentally, in the BB state, if the 2nd BB hand or the 3rd BB hand is won and a replay is awarded, the remaining payout counter is not decremented. In other words, the number of times the 2nd BB hand or the 3rd BB hand is won in the BB state does not affect the number of medals that can be expected in the BB state.

When none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), and none of the first BB winning prize, second BB winning prize, and CB winning prize are established, carry over. When a command is set (when the processing of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in steps S605 and S612, when end determination processing is performed in step S614, , the process advances to step S606 to set the status command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the shift roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the 2nd RT state, and the second promotion replays 1, 2 and 4th RT that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state. Since the transition replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the state are not won, the normal game state does not transition to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third replay win is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state and the transition replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the 4th RT state are not won. The 1RT state does not transition to the 3rd RT state or the 4th RT state.

Further, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(c)). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

Further, when the game state is the second RT state or the third RT state, the game state shifts to the fourth RT state when the eleventh regame win or the twelfth regame win is established. The 11th replay winning prize and the 12th replay winning prize are established when transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23(d)). . As already explained, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games is fixed. Therefore, even if the number for transition is stopped in the fourth RT state, the transition to the first RT state does not occur. Although the lottery table for the fourth RT state will be described later, the second replay is not won in the fourth RT state. Therefore, the transition to the first RT state caused by the second regame winning does not occur. Further, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. Similar to the first RT state to the third RT state, the game state shifts to the BB state when the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game.

In this slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages seven types of game states, namely, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the fourth RT state, the BB state, and the CB state. Mode, CZ mode (chance zone mode), AT mode (assist time mode), VB mode (virtual bonus mode, virtual bonus mode, pseudo bonus mode), BB mode (big bonus mode, big bonus mode). The main controller 101 manages the mode.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When the mode is shifted from the normal mode or the CZ mode to the BB mode, a lottery for transition to the CZ mode and a lottery for transition to the AT mode may be performed in the BB mode. When the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, the mode is shifted to the AT mode after the BB mode is ended, and when the lottery for the shift to the CZ mode is won, the mode is shifted to the CZ mode after the BB mode is ended. When neither transition lottery is won, the game shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the AT mode is shifted to the BB mode, the AT mode is restored after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is shifted to the BB mode, the VB mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2. Transition replay 1, transition replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not reported at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for transition to CZ mode and a lottery for transition to AT mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the CZ mode, and when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the AT mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the 1st RT state, it can be expected that about 1.59 medals will be reduced each time one game is played, and the game state at that time will be the 2nd RT state to the 2nd RT state. In the case of the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The CZ mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, as in the normal mode. In CZ mode, a lottery for transition to AT mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode in the CZ mode is set higher than the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode in the normal mode. In other words, the CZ mode is set as a mode that facilitates shifting to the AT mode, although the operation order is not notified in the same manner as in the normal mode. If the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, the CZ mode shifts to the AT mode. When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the CZ mode is shifted to the normal mode. CZ mode does not shift to VB mode.

The CZ mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state and CB state. However, in the CZ mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the winning order is replayed, so it is rare to shift from the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state, and corresponds to the normal game state or the 1st RT state. It will be done. In the CZ mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the 1st RT state, it can be expected that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time will be the 2nd RT state. In the case of the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The AT mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. AT mode is different from ATLV. 1 mode to ATLV. It is composed of four AT modes out of four modes, and any AT mode has a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the normal mode. When the lottery for shifting to VB mode is won, the AT mode is shifted to the VB mode. Shift to VB mode When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the AT mode shifts to the normal mode.

ATLV. 1 mode to ATLV. The 4 modes are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode is determined by the ATLV. 4 mode is the highest, ATLV. 1 mode is set to be the lowest, and ATLV. 1 mode, ATLV. 2 mode, ATLV. 3 mode, ATLV. The order of the 4 modes is set so that the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode increases.

The AT mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state and CB state. However, in the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. 44 correspond to the second RT state to the fourth RT state. In the AT mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state to the second RT state. In the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the AT mode continues at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the AT mode. In addition, in the AT mode and in the second RT state or the third RT state, if the transition replay 1 or the transition replay 2 is won, the operation order for the first replay win is notified, and the eleventh regame win or the second 12. There are cases where the operation sequence leading to the replay winning prize is announced, and there are cases where the state does not shift to the fourth RT state, and there are cases where it shifts. These configurations will be described later in detail.

The VB mode is a pseudo bonus mode, and is a mode called a so-called virtual bonus. The pattern corresponding to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB ("Red 7" pattern matching and "White BAR" pattern matching) stops, whereas the VB mode shifts to the bonus state, while the VB mode wins the 4th replay or the 5th Designs that will win replay prizes ("Red 7", "Red 7", and "Black BAR" symbols stop in the middle row, and "Black BAR", "Black BAR", and "Red 7" symbols in the middle row) " symbols stop, and "black BAR" symbols, "white BAR" symbols, and "white BAR" symbols stop in the middle row, etc.), although the transition to the bonus state does not occur, the first A transition to the 3RT state occurs, and as an overview, this is a mode in which the press order notification is generated in the same manner as in the AT mode. That is, the VB mode, like the AT mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins. The difference between the VB mode and the AT mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the AT mode the operation order for establishing the first replay winning prize is notified. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is announced (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to the normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, and CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. Therefore, the VB mode corresponds to the 3rd RT state or the 4th RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the 1st RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the 2nd RT state or the 2nd RT state. In the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode. Note that even in the VB mode, when transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won, there are cases where transition to the 4th RT state is not performed or transition is performed depending on the notification of the operation order, and such a configuration will also be described in detail later. do.

Regarding the transition of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the CZ mode, shift from the CZ mode to the AT mode, and return from the AT mode to the normal mode. . In the AT mode, a lottery for switching to the VB mode is performed, so if a loop occurs in which the AT mode is switched to the VB mode, and then the VB mode is returned to the AT mode, the player expects an increase in the number of owned medals. can.

As described above, when the normal mode and the CZ mode are compared, the CZ mode is set to have a higher probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery than the normal mode. Therefore, the CZ mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the AT mode is expected.

Also, in AT mode, ATLV. 1 mode to ATLV. Four modes are set, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode differs in each AT mode. When shifting from normal mode or CZ mode to AT mode, basically ATLV. 1 mode. ATLV. 1 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and ATLV. A lottery for transition to 2 modes is performed. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 2 mode, ATLV. 2 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased. ATLV. 2 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and ATLV. A lottery for transition to 3 modes is performed. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 3 modes, ATLV. 3 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased. And ATLV. 3 mode, a lottery for switching to VB mode is performed, and ATLV. A lottery for transition to the 4 mode is performed. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 4 mode, ATLV. 4 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased.

Therefore, when shifting to AT mode, ATLV. 1 mode→ATLV. 2 mode→ATLV. 3 mode→ATLV. By promoting the 4 mode and the AT mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode increases, and a loop between the AT mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the AT mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state are alternated by winning a prize in each replay or by stopping a transitional result. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the AT mode and VB mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation order that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is announced, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side. The steps will be described in order below.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
(1) Display mode transition lottery processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (step S312) of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. FIG. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag has already been set before the current game, and whether or not the current game is the carryover state of the first BB or the second BB.

If a negative determination is made in step S701, processing for switching the display mode in steps S702 to S710 and the like are executed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S701 and the current state is in the carryover state, processing for transitioning to the display mode or the like is not performed. That is, during the bonus carry-over state, the execution of the process for transitioning to the display mode, etc. is restricted.

Specifically, if a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the current game state is any of the normal game state, first RT state, and fourth RT state. If the determination in step S702 is affirmative and the state is the normal game state, the first RT state or the fourth RT state, either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S703. Determine whether or not The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won, and is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won, and the mode is shifted to the AT mode. A flag that is cleared when The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. This is a flag that is cleared in special zones (except when shifting to BB mode). When a negative determination is made in step S703, the first special combination process is executed in step S704.

<1st Special Win Process>
The first special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first special combination process is performed means the normal game state, the first RT state or the fourth RT state, and in which the AT mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the CZ mode. In the first special winning process, a shift lottery is performed to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the CZ mode, and a shift lottery to determine whether to shift to the AT mode. In addition, in the first special winning process, if the current display mode is the CZ mode, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the CZ mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the CZ mode. When not in the CZ mode means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is obtained as a table for AT mode lottery from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, then in step S803, a CZ mode table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for AT mode lottery. In the normal table and the CZ mode table, the probability of shifting to the AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination).

Specifically, in the mode lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a, the probability of winning each mode transition lottery is set differently depending on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery. It is

As shown in FIG. 38, the game results that trigger the mode transition lottery are strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlapping 1, weak. Cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, weak watermelon duplication 1, chance A duplication 1, chance B duplication 1, middle bell duplication 1, special reply A duplication 1, special reply A duplication 2, single 1st BB, single 2nd BB are set (hereinafter collectively referred to as “transition triggers”). These transition triggers have the same point value PV set regardless of the set value, and there is no set difference in winning probability. Also, the winning probability of each mode transition lottery is set so that there is no setting difference. On the other hand, strong cherry overlap 2, weak cherry overlap 2, strong watermelon overlap 2, weak watermelon overlap 2, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 2, middle bell overlap 2, special reply AB overlap 1, special reply AB overlap 2 are set so that there is a set difference in the winning probability, and the point value PV is set so that setting 1 generally has the lowest winning probability and setting 6 has the highest winning probability (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as “non-trigger”). Each mode transition lottery is not carried out for the non-trigger role with a setting difference in the winning probability. In other words, the mode transition lottery is performed with no set difference in the probability of winning in the transition trigger role having the same appearance rate, and the transition rate of each mode transition is the same.

In the lottery table for shifting to the AT mode acquired in steps S802 and S803, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of the transition trigger role. As shown in FIG. 39, for example, when the transition trigger is a strong cherry, the normal table has a 45% probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, while the CZ mode table has a 90% probability. The lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is easier to win in the CZ mode than in the normal mode. Further, when the transition trigger combination is Strong Cherry, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to AT mode is higher in both the normal table and the CZ mode table than when the transition trigger combination is Weak Cherry, It is set so that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the lottery for shifting to the AT mode.

After the table for AT mode transition lottery is acquired in step S802 or step S803, AT mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this process, the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for the transition to the AT mode.

In step S805, based on the result of processing in step S804, it is determined whether or not a lottery for switching to the AT mode has been won. If the AT mode shift lottery is won, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the AT mode that was won this time is the SAT mode. The SAT mode is an AT mode that starts after passing through a special zone for adding on. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal AT mode is 50, in the SAT mode the AT mode is started with the number of games added to the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the special zone for addition. . Therefore, the normal AT mode and the SAT mode have different advantages for the player, and the SAT mode is more advantageous for the player than the AT mode.

A lottery for transition to SAT mode is performed when a lottery for transition to AT mode is won (when a lottery for transition to AT mode is won in step S804), and this lottery for transition is set according to the type of transition trigger role and display mode. It is done based on the transition lottery table for the SAT mode that has been set. As shown in FIG. 39, in the SAT mode transition lottery table, winning the AT mode during the CZ mode makes it easier to win the lottery for transition to the SAT mode than when the AT mode is won during the normal mode. , and the superiority of the CZ mode is ensured. For example, during the normal mode, the probability of winning the lottery to shift to the AT mode triggered by a strong watermelon is 60%, and 5% of those who win the lottery to transition to the SAT mode will win. 57% of cases where a strong watermelon is won during the mode shift to the AT mode, and 3% shift to the SAT mode. On the other hand, during the CZ mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to AT mode with the strong watermelon as a trigger is 50%, and 50% of those who win the lottery for transition win the SAT mode. 25% of cases where a strong watermelon is won in CZ mode shift to AT mode, 25% shift to SAT mode, and the shift rate to SAT mode is higher than normal mode. Furthermore, the winning probability of the lottery to switch to the SAT mode differs depending on the trigger role for the transition. (5% winning probability), but in the CZ mode, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set to be higher for strong watermelon than for strong cherry.

If it is determined in step S806 that the SAT mode has been won, then in step S807 a process of setting a special zone winning flag is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S806, or after the processing of step S807 is executed, processing of setting an AT mode winning flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the AT mode is won, the AT mode winning flag is set, and in some of them (when the SAT mode is won), the specialized zone winning flag is set.

After performing the process of step S808, the process for setting the portent mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. Omen mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests that you have won AT mode, CZ mode, etc. is likely to occur. will be announced. The Omen Mode lasts from 0 to 32 games, and the number of games that the Omen Mode continues to play varies depending on the type of AT mode, CZ mode, etc. won and whether or not the bonus is won at the same time. ing. In addition, if AT mode, CZ mode, etc., are won at the same time as the bonus, the winning notification of the bonus is performed after passing through the omen mode, and after the bonus state ends, the AT mode, CZ mode, etc. are won. A notification will be made of what happened. Further, when the number of portent games is set to 0 games, winning notification is performed without going through the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S809, first, a process of acquiring the precursor game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 40, the number of precursor games table is set so that the number of precursor games to be selected differs depending on the current display mode (normal mode or CZ mode) and whether or not the player wins simultaneously with the bonus. . Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode, and when the AT mode is won, if the bonus is not simultaneously won, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 80%, and 6 games are selected. Games ~ 10 games are selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the AT mode and the bonus are simultaneously won, the 1st to 5th games are selected at 10%, and the 6th to 10th games are selected at 20%. 11-20 games are selected at 50% and 21-32 games are selected at 20%. That is, when the display mode is the normal mode, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time. In other words, when the bonus is not won at the same time, the AT mode winning is announced in a relatively short number of games from the AT mode winning game. On the other hand, when the current display mode is the CZ mode, 0 game is selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the prediction mode is not set, and AT mode winning notification is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In addition, when winning the SAT mode, which is an AT mode with an additional special zone, if the bonus is not simultaneously won, the 1st to 5th games will be selected at 70%, and the 6th to 10th games will be selected at 30%. is selected by On the other hand, if the bonus is simultaneously won when the AT mode is won, the 1st to 5th games are not selected, the 6th to 10th games are selected at 20%, and the 11th to 20th games are selected at 30%. 21st to 32nd games are selected at 50%. That is, even when the SAT mode is won, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time, and when the bonus is not won at the same time. In this case, the winning of the SAT mode is reported in a relatively short number of games from the winning game of the SAT mode. Even when the SAT mode is won, if the current display mode is the CZ mode, 0 game is selected as the precursor game number regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the sign mode is not set, and the SAT mode winning notification is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In the case of a bonus and winning at that time, the number of predictive games that are likely to be selected may be changed according to the type of duplicate combination. For example, a combination of replay (9th replay) and a bonus, such as Special Rep A Duplication 1 and Special Rep A Duplication 2, is a smaller combination such as Strong Cherry Duplication 1 and Weak Cherry Duplication 1 (Strong Cherry, It may be configured such that an indication mode that is longer than overlapping combination of low cherry, etc.) and bonus is more likely to be selected, or vice versa.

In step S810, based on the predictive game number table obtained in step S809 and lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a lottery process for the number of games in the current predictive mode is performed. Then, in step S811, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter reaches 0, the omen mode ends, and winning notification of winning a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or the like is performed.

In step S812, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, is executed. The portent command includes the result of the lottery that triggered the portent mode (the display mode to be shifted after the portent mode, BB mode and AT mode in the case of step S812) and information on the number of portent games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the portent command will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S812, the first special combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for switching to the AT mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, a CZ mode lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode lottery process, a table for CZ mode lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 and a counter for lottery is acquired from various counter area 106 e of RAM 106 . In the CZ mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the CZ mode is set according to the type of transition trigger combination (FIG. 39). For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the CZ mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

The case where step S813 is performed includes the case where the display mode is the CZ mode, and in this case also, the CZ mode lottery process is executed in step S813, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the CZ mode. with a table. As in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be changed depending on whether the CZ mode is in progress.

In step S814, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode is won based on the processing result of step S813. If it is determined that the CZ mode has been won, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the current display mode is the CZ mode. If it is not the CZ mode but the normal mode, in step S816, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed.

After the process of step S816 is performed, the precursor mode setting process is performed in steps S817 to S820 in the same manner as in steps S809 to S812. That is, in step S817, a precursor game number table is obtained, in step S818, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S819, the number of precursor games is set, in step S820, a precursor command is set, End the first special combination process.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the precursor game number table acquired in step S817, when winning in CZ mode alone, games 1 to 5 are selected at 90%, and games 6 to 10 are selected at 10%. Selected in %. On the other hand, if the CZ mode is won at the same time as the bonus, games 1 to 5 are selected at 20%, games 6 to 10 are selected at 30%, and games 11 to 20 are selected at 50%. be done. That is, even when the CZ mode is won, if the bonus is won at the same time, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if the bonus is not won at the same time, and if the bonus is not won at the same time, , the winning of the CZ mode is announced in a relatively short number of games from the winning game of the CZ mode.

In addition to the number of precursor games, regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won, AT mode tends to select a longer precursor game number than CZ mode, and SAT mode has a longer precursor game number than AT mode. is likely to be selected, and if a display mode advantageous to the player is won, a long predictive game number is likely to be selected. In addition, when the bonus is not won at the same time, the number of omen games of 10 games or less is selected, and if the omen mode continues for 11 games or more, it is confirmed that the bonus and the bonus are won at the same time. do. Also, even if the bonus is won at the same time, the number of precursor games of 20 games or less is selected in the simultaneous winning of the CZ mode and the bonus. In winning, the number of precursor games of 21 or more is also selected, and if the precursor mode continues for 21 or more games, the bonus+AT mode or SAT mode is determined. In this way, the enjoyment of predicting the winning content in relation to the number of precursor games is added.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the AT mode, the CZ mode, or the like is not won when the shift trigger role is won, or the pseudo portent mode is entered when the non-trigger role is won. Although such processing will be described later, the number of games set as the pseudo precursor mode is any one of 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, the occurrence of the winning suggestion effect frequently over 21 games or more determines that the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode that has been shifted to is the portent mode.

If it is determined in step S815 that the CZ mode has been won again during the CZ mode, then in steps S821 to S825 processing for adding a continuation game in the CZ mode is performed. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S822, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the CZ mode is executed.

Here, the addition refers to adding (increasing) the number of continuous games (remaining number) in CZ mode or AT mode, and the number of additional games is the value added (increased value) to the number of continuous games. corresponds to At step S822, a value to be added to the number of continuous games in the CZ mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of add-on games, a table for lottery for the number of add-on games in CZ mode is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. The table for the lottery for the number of added games in the CZ mode is set so that the number of added games increases according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, for example, 2 to 20 games in the CZ mode are added to the strong cherry, and the average number of added games is 15 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 30 games are added, and the average number of games added is 10 games. The average value (the number of games added to the expectation) is set so that the number of games for strong cherries is larger.

In step S823, processing for adding the number of games in the CZ mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S822 is added to a counter for managing the number of continuous games in the CZ mode (more specifically, a CZ mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). to add. Then, in step S824, after performing the process of setting the additional command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the first special combination process is terminated. The add-on command includes information that the add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, and the target (CZ mode or AT mode) of the add-on game. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that receives the add command will be described in detail later, but in the display control device 81, based on the reception of the add command, the add command as notification of the information contained in these add commands is displayed. Notification (additional production) is performed.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S821, the process proceeds to step S825. In step S825, the CZ mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first special combination process is terminated. The CZ mode add-on flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the CZ mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends while the CZ mode add-on flag is set, the CZ mode is added at the end of the bonus. That is, it is set so that the game to which the additional notification is performed differs depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32), if a negative determination is made in step S702, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second RT state or the fourth RT state. If it is in the second RT state or the fourth RT state, it is determined in step S706 whether either the VB mode win flag or the VB mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. The BV mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the VB mode, is set when shifting to the VB mode, and is cleared when the VB mode ends. If a negative determination is made in step S706, then in step S707 a second special combination process is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S705, it is determined in step S708 whether or not the player is in the bonus state. If it is not in the bonus state, or if the determination in step S706 is affirmative, then in step S709, the third special combination process is executed. If it is in the bonus state, in step S710, the fourth special combination process is executed.

<Second Special Win Process>
The second special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the second special win process is performed means the state of the second RT state or the fourth RT state, and in which the VB mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the AT mode. In the second special winning process, a transition lottery is performed as to whether or not the display mode should be shifted to the VB mode or the additional special zone. Note that the zone specializing in addition indicates a state in which the number of continuous games in the AT zone is increased with a high probability over a plurality of games. In addition, in the second special winning process, an AT mode level promotion lottery is performed, and a process for increasing the number of continuous AT mode games is performed.

That is, in step S901, a process of grasping the AT mode level is performed. As already explained, in this embodiment, ATLV. 1 mode to ATLV. Four AT mode levels of four modes are provided, and each level has a different probability of transition to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S901, the current AT mode level is ATLV. 1 mode to ATLV. 4 modes are determined.

In step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the AT mode level ascertained in step S901 is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 39, for example, between strong cherry 1 and weak cherry, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherry 1 than for weak cherry. Also, in the VB mode lottery table for each level, the probability of transition to the VB mode is different as a whole, and ATLV. 1 mode rather than ATLV. The ATLV. ATLV. The ATLV.3 mode has a higher transition probability to the VB mode. ATLV. The four modes are set so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher.

In step S903, the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used to perform a VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S903 corresponds to VB mode winning. In the present embodiment, when a VB mode shift lottery is conducted with a double role as a bonus as a shift trigger, the VB mode shift lottery is not won. In other words, the transition to the BB mode and the transition to the VB mode are prevented from being duplicated as much as possible, so that the advantages of overlapping roles with these bonuses are not too high.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the number of precursor games table is acquired in step S906, the number of precursor games is drawn in step S907, the number of precursor games is set in step S908, and the precursor command is set in step S909. End the role process. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the number of premonitory games is set to be 0 for all VB mode wins in the AT mode. Therefore, if the VB mode is won during the AT mode, the winning notification will be made in the next game.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for upgrading the AT mode level.

In step S910, an AT mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105 a of the ROM 105 and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 . A plurality of promotion lottery tables are provided according to the AT mode level. 1 mode table, ATLV. 2 mode table, ATLV. Tables for 3 modes and a total of 3 (a promotion lottery is not performed while staying in ATLV.4 mode) are provided. In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Also, in the table for each AT mode, ATLV. ATLV.1 rather than the table for 1 mode. The ATLV. ATLV. The table for 3 modes is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and as the AT mode level is promoted, it is set so that it becomes more difficult to be promoted to the next level.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S910 was promotion winning. In the case of promotion winning, AT mode promotion processing is performed in step S912. In this processing, the level flags provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 are rewritten to a level flag one level higher than the level flag corresponding to the current AT mode level. Thereafter, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command includes information on the AT mode to be promoted. Upon receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the AT mode of the level to be promoted. As an effect for the AT mode in the auxiliary display section 65, for example, different background color effects are set according to the level of the AT mode. In addition to notifying that the level has been promoted, control is performed so that the background color for the AT mode is performed in accordance with the level of the destination of the promotion.

When it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S913 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous AT mode games is performed in steps S914 to S921.

That is, in step S914, lottery processing for adding the number of AT mode games is performed. In such an additional lottery process, a table for AT mode additional lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, the table for the AT mode additional lottery is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is set so that the push order bell or the push order replay will trigger the lottery. As shown in FIG. 38, a common point value PV is set for the push order bell and push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order role") regardless of the setting value, and is set as the winning probability. There is no difference. Also, the odds of winning the lottery for adding the number of games, which is triggered by the winning order, and the number of games to add to the number of games at the time of winning are set so that there is no setting difference. In other words, there is no setting difference in the additional performance triggered by the pushing order. In the following description, the combination that triggers the lottery related to the instruction function, including the transition trigger combination, is also referred to as a specific combination.

As shown in FIG. 42, among the specific combinations, the odds of winning the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode are set to be lower for the winning combination than for the shift trigger combination. Therefore, it is expected that the number of games in the AT mode will be increased in the case where the shift opportunity role appears rather than the case where the winning role appears as a result of the lottery for each game. Then, it is considered that the player advances the game on the premise that he/she expects to win the transition opportunity role. On the other hand, the pushing order combination has a higher winning probability in each game than the transition opportunity combination, and can be said to be a game result that appears relatively easily. By adopting such a combination, it is possible to reduce the presence of the winning combination as an additional opportunity combination and increase the degree of surprise when an additional combination occurs. In addition, the chances of these additional performances based on the winning combination being performed are such that they can realistically occur during the AT mode (more specifically, if the initial number of games of 50 is played 2 to 3 times, they will occur once). appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to favorably generate an unexpected addition, such as an addition triggered by the above-described pushing-in order.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the AT mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of AT mode added games is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, the AT mode additional game number lottery table is set so that the additional game number differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in the strong cherry game, 20 to 200 games are added to the AT mode, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of games added is 20 games. The average value is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

In step S918, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. In this process, a counter for managing the number of continuous AT mode games (more specifically, an AT mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S917. Perform addition processing. In the subsequent step S919, an addition notification process is performed for notifying that the addition lottery has been won and the number of games.

<Additional notification processing>
Here, in the slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of addition notification are set when an increase in the number of continuous games in the AT mode occurs. More specifically, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the additional notification is performed is different as the mode of the additional notification, and the additional notification is given in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. (In the following description, also referred to as "immediate addition notification"), and in the case of performing an additional notification in which the game is later than the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined after the fact (In the following description, " (Also referred to as "post-boarding notification") is set.

In the instant addition notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred means, for example, a case in which a sign mode or a continuous effect occurs in response to a game in which an addition has occurred. A series of games is defined as a series of games that can be continued over a plurality of games from the game in which the addition occurred. The series of games includes cases where continuous effects do not occur. The game in which the addition occurs and the game until the addition notification occurs are regarded as a series of games, and the aspect of the addition notification is also included in the immediate addition notification.

On the other hand, in the post-addition notification, the game that is determined after the game after the game in which the addition occurred is not determined in the game in which the addition occurred, but for example, just before the end of the AT mode. This is different from the series of games in the immediate boarding notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post facto as the AT mode progresses, such as a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred.

An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the immediate boarding notification is for notifying a part of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG), and the post-boarding notification is for the remaining games in the AT mode, etc. The number will be reported later. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a display remaining number counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is a counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) is It is equal to the total value of the display remaining number counter HG and the post-loading counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented unless the post-loading notification occurs even if the game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 43, in this embodiment, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (remaining game number display ZGP) is a predetermined number (1) while the AT mode is being executed. When this is the case, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), the post-loading notification is generated. In the post-addition notification, it is reported that the number of games corresponding to the post-addition counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the reported amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the post-addition report to the remaining game on the auxiliary display section 65. The number display ZGP also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after completing one game).

In this way, when the extra winning is selected, a difference can occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). On the other hand, when the immediate boarding notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). In the slot machine 10, the add-on counter BG is referred to when the add-on win is made, and whether the add-on notification is selected or the immediate add-on notification is selected depends on the current value of the add-on counter BG.

In the above-described addition notification processing in step S919, the game for which the addition notification is to be performed is set, and when the addition notification is to be performed in the game, the execution timing of the addition notification is set. That is, as shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S1001, a process of grasping the trailing counter BG of the various counter areas 106e is performed. In subsequent step S1002, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether the current addition notification should be a post-addition notification or an immediate addition notification. In the notification game lottery process, a post-loading lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not post-loading notification is to be performed according to the value of the post-boarding counter BG grasped in step S1001.

As shown in FIG. 44, the add-on lottery table is set so that the probability of selecting the add-on notification differs depending on the value of the add-on counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the add-on win. there is For example, at the time of addition triggered by a strong cherry, if the subsequent addition counter BG is less than 30, the subsequent addition notification is selected at 20% (the immediate addition notification is selected at 80%). When the add-on counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the add-on notification is selected at 10%, and when the add-on counter BG is 100 or more, the add-on notification is selected at 5%, so that the value of the add-on counter BG is large. It is set so that the selection rate of the post-boarding notification becomes lower as the number increases.

In addition, as the type of specific role that triggered the additional winning, there are various types of rare roles (low probability trigger result, low probability result) with relatively low winning probability such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. So-called normal roles (high-probability trigger result, high-probability result) with a relatively high winning probability, such as push-order replay and various push-order bells, have a higher pick-up selection rate when the pick-up counter BG value is small. is set. More specifically, in notification game lottery processing triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, if the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, the post-addition notification is selected with a probability of 100%.

As described above, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the addition notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, basically, as the AT mode game progresses, the value of the post-addition counter BG often increases, and conversely, at the beginning of the AT mode game, the value of the post-addition counter BG is 0 or small. value.

That is, when an additional winning is made in the early stages of the AT mode game, the probability that the subsequent addition notification is selected is high, especially when an additional winning is triggered by a normal combination that is not a rare combination such as a push order replay or a push order bell. If it is the early stages of the AT mode, the subsequent notification is always selected. As a result, after the AT mode is started, the trailing counter BG tends to accumulate relatively early.

After executing the notification game lottery process in step S1002, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional winning game is not won and the immediate addition notification is selected, in step S1004, processing is performed to add the current additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S1005, notification timing setting processing is executed for setting at which timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process of setting at what timing in the current game the additional notification is to be performed.

In one game, the addition notification is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of addition games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 45, as the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of stop operation, reel 1, reel 2, and reel 3. Then, the time of the stop operation of the first reel, the time of the stop operation of the second reel, and the time of the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of how the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the frontmost side to an operating position arranged on the farthest side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released from the hand and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The addition notification is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. In other words, in a game in which an additional notification occurs, the additional effect can occur not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the addition notification execution timing table, when the number of games to be added is relatively small, for example, 5 games to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing of the stop OFF operation of the first reel is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation of each reel, and the operation on the rear side is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of games with a relatively large number of games to be added is, for example, 100 games or more, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected. is performed 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( When all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. In this case as well, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively easier to be selected.

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the additional notification is more likely to occur during the stop OFF operation than during the stop ON operation of each reel. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, the second reel stop operation is the second most likely to be selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is the least likely to be selected during operation.

In terms of the relationship with the number of additional games, the greater the number of additional games, the more likely it is that the third reel stop OFF operation will be selected. In other words, when the player is aware of the occurrence of the additional notification in advance, if the additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is greatly affected by the occurrence of the addition of a large number of games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

In step S1005, the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game is set based on the execution timing table of the additional notification. After that, the process for addition notification is terminated. In this case, the information that the current addition is notified in the current game as an immediate addition notification, and the information regarding the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game are executed following the addition notification processing. It is set as an add-on command in the add-on command setting process (step S920). The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including these information sets the add-on notification effect based on these information. This processing will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the post-addition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S1007, after performing the process of setting the post-add flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the add-on notification process is terminated.

The post-boarding flag is set by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 to indicate that the post-boarding notification should be performed when the value of the post-boarding counter BG is greater than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. It is a flag for grasping. Further, in this case, in the addition command setting processing executed subsequent to the addition notification processing, information indicating that the addition notification will not occur in the current game is set in the addition command. The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including this information performs control so that the add-on notification is not generated in the current game.

Returning to the description of the second special combination process (FIG. 34), after the addition notification process is executed in step S919, an addition command including the processing result of the addition notification process is sent to the display control device 81 in step S920. After performing the process of setting it as an output target, the process of the second special combination ends.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S921. In step S921, the AT mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the AT mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the AT mode add-on flag is set, the AT mode is added on at the end of the bonus. That is, as in the CZ mode game number addition notification, the game for which the addition notification is performed is set to differ depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

If it is determined in step S915 that the additional lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S922. In step S922, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, when a player wins a special role in the AT mode and does not win a lottery for transition to the VB mode or a lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode, etc., a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is performed. In the special zone lottery process, a table for the special zone transfer lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the special zone is performed by a lottery counter or the like. conduct. As shown in FIG. 39, the special zone transfer lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the transfer lottery differs depending on the type of the transition opportunity role among the specific roles. As already explained, among the transition trigger roles that overlap with the bonus, while it is not possible to win the VB mode transition lottery, as shown in FIG. It is set so that the lottery for adding numbers will always be won (with a probability of 100%). Therefore, the special zone transfer lottery is not performed with the overlapping roles with these bonuses as a trigger, and the special zone transfer lottery is when a strong cherry or a weak cherry, etc., which are not overlapping roles with the bonus, is won, It is set so that the player can win the lottery for transition to the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games when the player does not win the lottery. For example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries wins with a probability of 5%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries wins with a probability of 0.5%. On the other hand, the special zone transfer lottery based on strong watermelon wins with a probability of 15%, and the special zone transfer lottery based on weak watermelon wins with a probability of 5%.

In step S923, based on the result of the process in step S922, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won. When winning, in step S924, a process of setting a special zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. Then, in step S925, a process for acquiring a precursor game number table is performed, in step S926, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S927, a process for setting the number of precursor games is performed, and in step S928, a precursor command is executed. is set, the second special combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S925 to S928 are similar to the processes of steps S906 to S909, for example, and are processes for setting the portent mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S923 and none of the lottery for transition to VB mode, the lottery for adding the number of games in AT mode, or the lottery for transition to specialized zone is not won, pseudo-addition notification is performed in step S929. After performing the processing, the second special combination processing is terminated. The pseudo-additional notification process is a process for sustaining the sense of expectation by generating an effect similar to that at the time of winning even if the lottery is not won.

<Third Special Win Process>
Next, the third special combination processing executed in step S709 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The case where the third special win process is performed means the state of the third RT, the state of the second RT or the state of the fourth RT, and the state in which the VB mode is won. The display mode in this case corresponds to AT mode or VB mode. In the third special combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode and a lottery for transition to a specialized zone are performed.

That is, in step S1101, AT mode game number addition lottery processing is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. Note that the odds of winning the additional lottery may differ between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1101.

In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1101 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1104 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the AT mode. In step S1105, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. , ends the third special combination processing. The processing of steps S1103 to S1107 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S920. Note that the number of additional games may differ between the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1104.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is executed. In other words, even if a special winning combination is won in the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is not won, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S922, and is performed based on the table for the specialized zone transfer lottery (FIG. 39). The processing of steps S1110 to S1116 is the same as the processing of steps S923 to S929. Also, if it is determined in step S1103 that the bonus winning flag is set, the AT mode addition flag is set in step S1107, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). The fourth special combination process in step S710 will be briefly explained. As already explained, the fourth special combination process is carried out during the bonus state. As the game results during the bonus state, the first BB hand, the second BB hand and the third BB hand are set. Win the 2nd hand or the 3rd hand in BB (FIG. 29). When the 1st win in BB is established, 9 medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the 2nd hand in the BB or the 3rd hand in the BB is won, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or the like or a lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode or the like is performed. If the transfer lottery is won, the contents thereof are reported after the bonus state ends, and if the add-on lottery is won, the add-on notification processing is executed and the add-on notification is generated in the same way as when the win is made during the AT mode or the like. do.

When it is determined in step S701 that it is in the carryover state, or after executing any of the processes in steps S704, S707, S709 and S710, in step S711, the result of the current lottery process is pushed. It is determined whether or not the order replay or the pushing order bell win was made. In the case of winning the first prize, the first prize process is executed in step S712. The pushing process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 is executed, the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As described above, after the specialized zone winning flag is set based on winning the lottery for transition to the SAT mode or the lottery for transition to the specialized zone, the transition to the specialized zone occurs. This is a flag that is set when the player wins (when the 7th regame win is established). If the specialized zone flag is set in step S713, the specialized zone processing is executed in step S714. When a negative determination is made in step S713, or after the process of step S714 is executed, this lottery result corresponding process is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zone>
The specialized zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special zone processing, first, in step S1201, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In subsequent step S1202, AT mode add-on game number lottery processing is performed. In the subsequent step S1203, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. Then, in step S1204, the addition notification process is executed, and in step S1205, after setting the addition command, the special zone process ends. The processing of steps S1202 to S1205 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S920. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-addition-games lottery process of step S1202 than in the number-of-addition-games lottery process of step S917 (FIG. 41). In addition, in the specialized zone, regardless of the game result, it is set so that the number of AT mode games is always added (FIG. 42).

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, on the condition that the carryover state is not in effect, the lottery for transition to the CZ mode, the AT mode, or the VB mode and the process for adding the number of continuous games in the CZ mode or the AT mode are performed. etc. In other words, even if a special role is won, during the carry-over state, the CZ mode, AT mode or VB mode transition lottery, the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the CZ mode or AT mode, etc. are not performed. its implementation is restricted. When a lottery for shifting to the CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode is won, the winning of the transition lottery is notified after the precursor game is played. Therefore, the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for Transitioning Game State Based on Display Mode Transition Lottery Results>
(2) In the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the processing for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the game state are performed. A process for performing is performed. Therefore, first, a description will be given of the processing related to the notification that the transfer lottery has been won.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode change notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode change notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursory games is counted in the winning result handling process described later, and the number of precursory games is decremented by one each time one game is completed. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning a bonus. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1303, and then this mode transition notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won by, for example, displaying "Bonus confirmed!!" It should be noted that the type of the winning bonus (either the first BB or the second BB) may be notified together.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when a bonus, AT mode, CZ mode, etc., are won at the same time, the AT mode, etc. is notified of the winning at the end of the bonus notified in step S1303. The processing related to the winning notification will be described in detail later, but when winning notification such as AT mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification, winning notification such as AT mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1303. A configuration in which a command is set is preferable.

If a negative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the CZ mode. If the CZ mode winning flag is set, the CZ mode winning flag is cleared in step S1305. Then, in step S1306, the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current display mode is the CZ mode. In step S1307, the CZ mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the CZ mode is started. Such notification will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S1308, counting of the number of CZ mode continuations is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the CZ mode is set in the CZ mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1308, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1304 that the CZ mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the AT mode. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1310. Then, in step S1311, the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in accordance with winning the AT mode shift lottery. After that, in step S1312, an AT mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1312, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of notification of winning in the SAT mode is different from the mode of notification of winning in the AT mode. Therefore, in step S1312, the configuration may be such that the AT mode winning notification command is set so as to include information as to whether or not the SAT mode is selected. The AT mode winning notification mode and the SAT mode winning notification mode may be different as long as they are identifiable by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification mode for the SAT mode, which has a higher degree of advantage. It is preferable that the mode is more flashy than the mode of notification of winning in the AT mode.

It should be noted that the AT mode and the SAT mode may be configured to share the winning notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to make it look as if the content of winning has been promoted from the AT mode to the SAT mode from the AT mode winning notification game to the start notification game, and the AT mode winning notification is made. It is possible to eliminate delay due to the difference between the game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1309 that the AT mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the VB mode win flag is set, the VB mode win flag is cleared in step S1314. Then, in step S1315, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won. After that, in step S1316, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1316, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1313 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1317. In step S1317, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode change notification process is terminated. When it is set, in step S1318, processing for clearing the special zone winning flag is performed. Then, in step S1319, a process of setting a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag for executing the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh regame winning. After the process of step S1319 is executed, in step S1320 the special zone winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this mode transition notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specialized zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S1317, the mode change notification process is terminated.

That is, of the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone that transition through the precursor mode, the CZ mode is changed based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. be started. On the other hand, for the AT mode, VB mode, and special zone, only notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery or VB mode transition lottery is based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. The AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone are not started even if the number of precursor games becomes 0. This is because the CZ mode as a display mode does not involve the transition of the game state, while the AT mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the game state. This is due to the difference that VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state. As for the specialized zone, there are cases where the transition of the game state is not accompanied (from the 3rd RT state to the 3rd RT state). The processing configuration is as described above.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay winning is established, and the 3rd RT state is entered into the second promoted replays 1 and 2. , and when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, when a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or VB mode is won, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is reported in the game in which the player wins the winning combination for shifting the game state. It is configured to allow the game state to be shifted. It should be noted that from the notification of winning the AT mode or VB mode transition lottery to the start of the AT mode or VB mode (until the game state transitions), notification as a preparation state (for example, " In preparation") is performed.

<Description on transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the pushing process (step S712) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32). Here, prior to the description of the pushing process, the outline of the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
Notification of the order of operations at the time of winning a winning hand (push order notification, push order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68 . Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. Notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop button in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

Explaining the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Pushing down process>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 48, the pushing process executed in step S712 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32) will be described.

In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1401 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1402 to determine whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. As already explained, the AT notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the AT mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 46). be.

When the notification flag for AT is set, in step S1403, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the third re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(a)). After that, in step S1404, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The pressing order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

In step S1403, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, basically, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the AT mode winning notification is performed after the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after switching to the AT mode and before the transition to the AT mode. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the AT mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an erroneous operation, etc. Even in such a case, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 will be won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1405 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set, in step S1407, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(b)). Thereafter, in step S1408, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the actual push order process is terminated.

In this way, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the state where the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the third. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1402, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for AT is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notifying the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the process for informing the pushing order. Therefore, for example, when the AT mode ends, the AT notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the 1st RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, and the 3rd replay win is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of transition to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the AT mode is not won by chance and the game shifts to the second RT state, the game immediately shifts to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1409 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1410, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1411 whether or not the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM . As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 46). be. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursory games in the precursory mode becomes 0 after winning the special zone transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 46). be.

When the notification flag for VB or the notification flag for specialized zone is set, in step S1412, processing for notifying the pressing order of the fourth re-game or fifth re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1413, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1410, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1411, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed in step S1407, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1408. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, when winning the second promotion replays 1 and 2 without winning the VB mode or the special zone, if the AT mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning prize is performed, and the AT mode is performed. If it is not in the mode, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1414 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay. Affirmative determination in step S1414 means that any one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replays wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1415, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1416 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set and the notification flag for special zone is set, in step S1417, the process for notification of the pressing order of the seventh regame is executed. Specifically, among the first replay, the third replay, and the sixth to eighth regames, the operation order corresponding to the seventh regame win is reported (see FIG. 23(c)). After that, in step S1418, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1415, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1416, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed in step S1403, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1404. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning the BAR replay without winning the VB mode or the specialized zone, if the AT mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the third replay win is performed, and the state shifts to the second RT state. is generated, and if the AT mode is not in effect, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1414, it is determined in step S1419 whether or not the current lottery result is transition replay 1 or transition replay 2. Affirmative determination in step S1419 means that one of the first replay, second replay, eleventh replay, and twelfth replay wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1420, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set, it is determined whether or not the notification flag for transition is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S1421. The transition notification flag is a flag that is set when a condition that enables transition to the fourth RT state is established. Processing for setting the shift notification flag will be described later in detail. When the notification flag for AT is set and the notification flag for shift is set, in step S1422, the 11th re-game or 12th re-game push order notification process is executed. Specifically, of the first regame, second regame, eleventh regame, and twelfth regame, the operation order corresponding to the eleventh regame win or the twelfth regame win is reported (FIG. 23 ( d) see). After that, in step S1423, after a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, the actual push order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1420, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1421, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed in step S1407, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1408. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won without the conditions enabling transition to the 4th RT state being established, if the AT mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first regame winning prize is performed. If it is not in the AT mode, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1419, it is determined in step S1424 whether or not the result of the current lottery is winning of the pressing order bell. If the pressing order bell wins, it is determined in step S1425 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the CZ mode. If it is not the normal mode or the CZ mode, in step S1426, a process for notifying the pressing order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1427, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1424 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1425, the main pushing order process is terminated without performing the process for informing the pushing order.

Note that in the case of a configuration in which at least a predetermined number of (once) push order notifications are executed in the CZ mode, it is determined in step S1425 whether or not a predetermined number of push order notifications have been executed during the CZ mode. should be If a negative determination is made in this determination, the predetermined number of times is counted, and the processing for notifying the pressing order in step S1426 may be performed.

In addition, when the pressing order bell is won in the situation where the notification flag for AT is set (when negative determination is made in step S1425), if the game state of this time is the normal game state, it corresponds to the first minor winning prize. It is preferable not to notify the pressing order. By doing so, the transition output is stopped, and the game state is shifted to the 1st RT state, that is, after that, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 wins and the transition to the high RT state is possible. It becomes possible.

<Processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, as a result of performing the notification for shifting the game state as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the shift of the game state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1501, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the number of continued games in the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted. In the subsequent step S1502, a post-loading notification process is executed. The post-addition notification process is a process for performing the post-addition notification described with reference to FIG. On the condition that the addition information corresponding to the addition counter BG (post-addition notification) is executed. Then, the value corresponding to the executed addition notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the addition counter BG, and the addition flag is cleared under the condition that the addition counter BG is 0.

In the subsequent step S1503, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the third replay winning. As described above, when the third regame winning has been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), the processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1504, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT notification flag is not set is the case where the third re-game winning is established without the condition for shifting to the AT mode being established. The winning result handling process is terminated as it is. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. In addition to the AT mode flag, a CZ mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the AT mode, the AT mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1505, the case where it is determined that the AT mode flag is set includes not only the AT mode, but also the VB mode and the specialized zone. .

At step S1505, if the AT mode flag is set, the display mode is already the AT mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, the process for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S1506 to S1509.

That is, in step S1506, the AT mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1507, the AT mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1508, counting of the number of AT mode continuations is started. Specifically, the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the AT mode.

After performing the process of step S1508, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the specialized zone flag is set. A positive determination in step S1509 means that the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1510, (steps S1519 to S1521). The processing for starting the additional specialized zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1509, the winning result handling process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1503 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been established as a result of this stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) performs processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1512, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the 4th and 5th re-game wins are established without winning the VB mode transition lottery. , the winning result handling process is terminated. If the VB notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S1513 whether or not the VB mode flag has been set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1514 to S1516.

That is, in step S1514, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that shifts through the AT mode, and the shift to the AT mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

After that, in step S1515, the VB mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1516, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 25) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1516, the main winning result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1511 that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1517. In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the seventh regame winning has been established as a result of this stop. In this embodiment, when the seventh replay winning has been established, that is, the middle stage of the left reel 32L has a "black BAR" symbol, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M has a "black BAR" symbol, and the middle stage of the right reel 32R has a "black BAR" symbol. When the "black BAR" pattern stops and the "black BAR" pattern stops on the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the special addition zone. The case where the 7th re-game win is established means the case where BAR Replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game win. There is (Fig. 23(c)).

If the seventh replay winning has been established, it is determined in step S1518 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. If the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1519 to S1521. As already described, when the SAT mode is started, even if the affirmative determination is made in step S1509 and the process of step S1510 is performed, the process of steps S1519 to S1521 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1519, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

After that, in step S 1520 , the specialized zone start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1521, counting of the number of continuations of the specialized zone is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1521, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1517 or step S1518, the process proceeds to step S1522. In step S1522, it is determined whether or not the 11th and 12th regame wins have been established as the result of this stop. As described above, when the 11th and 12th regame winnings are established, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) performs processing for shifting the game state to the fourth RT state. In this case, in step S1523, it is determined whether or not the transition notification flag is set. If the notification flag for transition is set, it means that the 11th and 12th regame wins are established after the condition enabling the transition to the 4th RT state is established. , the first fixed RT start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the first fixed RT start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the transition to the fourth RT state has occurred. Such notification will be described later in detail. On the other hand, if the notification flag for transition is not set in step S1523, it means that the 11th and 12th re-game wins have been established in a situation where the condition enabling the transition to the 4th RT state is not established. In this case, the second fixed RT start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1525. The display control device 81 that has received the second fixed RT start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the transition to the fourth RT state has occurred. This notification will be described in detail later, but the notification when the first fixed RT start command is received differs from the notification when the second fixed RT start command is received to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. there is If a negative determination is made in step S1522, the process for dealing with winning results is terminated after executing either of the processes in step S1522 and step S1525.

As described above, in particular, based on the winning of the combination (third to fifth replay) corresponding to shifting the gaming state to the second RT state or the third RT state, RT state processing (FIG. 21) , performs processing for shifting the display mode. This is to avoid the AT mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, when the display mode is shifted, among those accompanied by the shift of the game state, when shifting to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode or the CZ mode to the AT mode, or when shifting from the AT mode to the VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the AT mode or VB mode to the special zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, the display mode transition is not performed when the game state transitions due to, for example, a second regame win as a fall replay or a stop of the transition result. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games played. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Number of games management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1501 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes is 0. Then, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be played with the number of bets from 1 to 3, and in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as the specific number. If the bet is not 3 bet, the game number management process is terminated. In other words, in games with 1 bet or 2 bets, the number of omen mode games and the number of continuous games such as the CZ mode are not counted. Note that the counting may be performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the current game is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the game is in a bonus state. If the determination in step S1602 is affirmative, in step S1603 the processing for clearing the display mode flags of the CZ mode flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag is performed, and then this game count management processing ends. do. In other words, when the bonus win flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the AT mode or the like is not counted. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1603, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1603, while the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the AT notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after going through a preparation state such as an AT mode, these flags are used to notify the pressing order for shifting the game state, and the game state before the bonus can be restored. On the other hand, when a bonus is won during the CZ mode or special zone, the CZ mode or special zone is terminated by the bonus win. Also, in step S1603, the CZ mode winning flag, the AT mode winning flag, etc. are not cleared. Therefore, when the AT mode or the like and the bonus are won at the same time, the winning notification based on these winning flags is performed after the bonus is finished.

If the determination in step S1602 is negative, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1605. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1604 (not in precursor mode), or after the process of step S1605 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1606 to S1628. .

That is, in step S1606, it is determined whether the current display mode is the CZ mode. If it is the CZ mode, the process advances to step S1607 to perform a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ mode continuation counter, thereby decrementing the number of CZ mode continuation games. Then, in step S1608, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode continuation counter is 0. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S1609, and the CZ mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1610. Upon receiving the CZ mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the CZ mode will end in the current game. After performing the process of step S1610, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1606 that the mode is not the CZ mode, the process advances to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. If it is in AT mode, the process advances to step S1612 to determine whether it is a specialized zone in AT mode. That is, in the case of shifting to the specialized zone at the start of the AT mode as in the SAT mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1612. If it is in the special zone, the game number management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1625 to S1628. These processes will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1612 that the zone is not a special zone, in step S1613, the AT mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of AT mode continuation games. Then, in step S1614, it is determined whether or not the AT mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1615, and the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1616. After that, in step S1617, an AT mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the AT mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1617, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1611 that the mode is not the AT mode, the process advances to step S1618. In step S1618, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1619 to determine whether or not it is an additional specialized zone. If it is not the special zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1620, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1621, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1622, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1623. After that, in step S1624, the VB mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1624, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1619 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1625. As already explained, even if it is determined in step S1612 that the zone is the specialized zone in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1625. In step S1625, the special zone continuation game number is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1626, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1627, and the special zone end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1628. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in the current game. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the processing of step S1628, the number-of-games management processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1618 or step S1626, the game number management process is terminated.

<End determination processing>
Next, as the processing at the end of the bonus, the end determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S614 in the bonus state process (FIG. 27). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether or not the bonus termination condition is met, and when the bonus is to be terminated, processing for notification of winning such as the AT mode in which the bonus and duplicate winning are performed, and AT mode in which the bonus and duplicate winning are performed. For example, processing for adding the number of games is performed.

That is, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established. As already explained, during the bonuses of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the 1st hand in the BB is established with a high probability, and the 2nd hand in the BB and the 3rd hand in the BB are partially established (FIG. 28). When the 1st role in the BB is won, the 1st minor role is mainly won, and a predetermined number of medals (9 medals) are paid out, and the 2nd role in the BB and the 3rd role in the BB are replayed in the 9th replay. This is a replay of the tenth replay, and medals are not paid out even if a prize is established. Also, during the CB, any of the CB medium and small wins 1 to CB small and medium wins 4 is won, and even if you win any of them, the first small win is mainly established and the predetermined number (15) of medals will be paid out. Step S1701 is a process for determining whether or not a small winning combination that causes a medal payout has been established among the winning combinations during the bonus or CB.

If it is determined in step S1701 that a minor win has been established, then in step S1702 processing is performed to subtract the current game payout number from the remaining payout number. When a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 is executed, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0 in step S1703. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after the bonus end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1704, in steps S1705 to S1719, processing for notification of winning such as AT mode, AT mode, etc. Processing for adding the number of continuous games is performed.

That is, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the number of precursor games is selected in step S1706, the number of precursor games is set in step S1707, and the precursor command is set in step S1708. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursor games in step S1706, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursor games is 0 with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1707, the number of premonitory games of 0 game is always set, and winning notification of AT mode or the like is performed in the next game after the bonus ending game. After executing the process of step S1708, the end determination process is terminated.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode winning flag is set in step S1709. If the CZ mode win flag is set, the process for the portent mode of steps S1706 to S1708 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the CZ mode winning flag is not set in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in step S1710. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1706 to S1708 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in a situation in which the CZ mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the CZ mode and the VB mode win notification is performed through the premonitory game.

In addition, the case where the bonus ends when the AT mode winning flag or CZ mode winning flag is set is when the AT mode, CZ mode, etc. and the bonus are won at the same time, or when the AT mode, CZ mode, etc. win notification This is the case when the bonus is won during the omen mode of. On the other hand, when the bonus is terminated while the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode and the bonus are simultaneously won in the AT mode, or during the premonitory mode of the VB mode winning notification (in this case, This is a case where the bonus is won in the next game after winning the VB mode, because the premonition mode of the 0 game is selected.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1710, the process proceeds to step S1711. In step S1711, it is determined whether or not the AT mode addition flag is set. If the AT mode addition flag is set, AT mode addition game count lottery processing is performed in step S1712, AT mode game addition processing is performed in step S1713, and addition notification processing is performed in step S1714. , and an addition command is set in step S1715. The processes of steps S1712 to S1715 are the same as the processes of steps S917 to S920. After executing the process of step S1715, the end determination process is terminated.

If the AT mode addition flag is not set in step S1711, it is determined in step S1716 whether or not the CZ mode addition flag is set. If the CZ mode add-on flag is set, a CZ mode add-on game count lottery process is performed at step S1717, a CZ mode add-on game count process is performed at step S1718, and an add-on command is set at step S1719. . The processes of steps S1717 to S1719 are the same as the processes of steps S822 to S824. If a negative determination is made in step S1716, or if the process of step S1719 has been executed, the end determination process ends.

As described above, on the main controller 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) winning result. As a result of the processing for shifting the display mode based on , the pressing order notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65, the game state is shifted so as to follow the transition of the display mode, and further, A pressing order bell winning can be generated by the pressing order notification performance by the auxiliary display section 65, and a large amount of medals can be expected to be obtained.

Here, when the pressing order replay or the pressing order bell win is performed, if the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 (the pressing order notification effect by the display control device 81) is performed, in addition to the pressing order notification effect, the main control The instruction monitor 68 connected to the device 101 also informs of the pressing order. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 52(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is a bonus that can be won in the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the SAT mode, or the CZ mode in a situation where the display mode is the normal mode, or that the AT mode, the SAT mode, or the CZ mode can be won at the same time. Lights up when (1st BB) is won. In addition, when the AT mode, the SAT mode, the CZ mode, or the first BB is completed and the mode is shifted to the normal mode (excluding the case where the AT mode or the like is shifted again after passing through the precursor mode or the like), the light is turned off.

That is, the navigation state (AT mode, SAT mode, high frequency mode) in which the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay can be easily reported to the player in an advantageous manner to facilitate winning, and the navigation state can be changed. A chance state (CZ mode, first BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win the transition lottery, or a winning state that has won the lottery but has not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state. The section including (winning mode) is regarded as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the advantageous section and turned off during the normal section, which is not the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means) for clearly indicating whether or not there is a section.

The eighth display segment N8 is a game that starts a game in which a game result (such as a special hand such as a strong cherry) that triggered an advantageous section such as the navigation state, the chance state, and the winning state is won and the game result is established. Then, at a timing before the game operation by the player is permitted in the game subsequent to the start game, lighting is started as a notification that the advantageous section will be reached. More specifically, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game result that triggered the advantageous interval is established, that is, regardless of whether or not there is a dropout, the game in which the game result is won is played. As the start game, the eighth display segment N8 is lit at a timing before the bet operation is permitted as a game operation by the player in the next game. In other words, the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 starts before the start of the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

The section display first process and the section display second process will be described below as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first processing>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it means that the AT mode, SAT mode, or CZ mode transition lottery is won as an advantageous section, or during these modes. indicates the case. If a negative determination is made in step S1801 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, it is determined whether or not either the CZ mode winning flag or the AT mode winning flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is turned off and either the CZ mode winning flag or the AT mode winning flag is set, in the current lottery process, the lottery for transition to the CZ mode or the AT mode , or a case where a lottery for switching to the SAT mode is won. As already explained, in the first special winning process (FIG. 33), if the lottery for transition to CZ mode is won, the CZ mode winning flag is set, and if the lottery for transition to AT mode or SAT mode is won. , an AT mode win flag is set. In step S1802, if none of the flags is set, the section display first processing is terminated.

If either the CZ mode winning flag or the AT mode winning flag is set, the process advances to step S1803 to start displaying the section indicator by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

After executing the process of step S1803, in step S1804, the process of starting to count the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is executed, and then the first section display process ends. The number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is determined by measuring the number of games in the advantageous interval AG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S1804, the number of games in the advantageous interval is set to 0, which is the initial value. I do. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is incremented by 1 for each game in the advantageous interval.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1805 processing is performed to continue the display during the advantageous section, and then this first section display processing is performed. exit. Specifically, in step S1805, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S415 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being lit. If it is turned off (non-lighting, non-display), the second section display process is terminated. If it is during lighting display, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games in the advantageous interval, and counts the number of games played while the eighth display segment N8 is lit. After executing the process of step S1902, the number-of-remaining-games management process is executed in step S1903. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, first, in step S2001, the number of precursor games G1 is grasped. The number of precursor games G1 indicates the number of remaining precursor mode games, for example, when the current state is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). . In step S2002, the CZ mode continuation number G2 is grasped. The CZ mode continuation number G2 represents the number of remaining CZ mode games, for example, when the current state is the CZ mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). . In step S2003, the AT mode continuation number G3 is grasped. The AT mode continuation count G3 represents the number of remaining AT mode games, for example, when the current state is the AT mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). . In step S2004, the VB mode continuation number G4 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G4 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, for example, when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). . In step S2005, the specialized zone continuation number G5 is grasped. The specialized zone continuation count G5 represents the number of games remaining in the specialized zone, for example, when the current status is the specialized zone in the advantageous section, and is set by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). subtracted. In step S2006, the number of remaining BB games G6 is grasped. The number of remaining BB games G6 represents the number of remaining BB mode games, for example, when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, and is performed each time the game number management process (FIG. 50) is started. Then, it is decremented by 1 in a subtraction process (not shown) on condition that the BB mode is on.

Here, values of 0 or more may be input to these continuation numbers G1 to G6 even if the mode or zone does not correspond to the current state. Specifically, for example, in the VB mode, the specialized zone, or the BB mode, the counting of the number of remaining games in the AT mode is stopped. When a transition occurs, a value of 0 or more is input to the AT mode continuation count G3 and the continuation count of each of these modes.

In step S2007, a process of calculating the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by integrating G1 to G6 grasped in each process of steps S2001 to S2006. By performing such processing, it is possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section continues. In the subsequent step S2008, the number of games in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval AG) and the number of remaining games ZG are added to calculate the total number of games in the advantageous interval SG. Then, in step S2009, the number of vacant games (the number of vacant games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the above-mentioned total number of games SG in the advantageous interval from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous interval. process.

After the processing of step S2009 is performed, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the number of empty games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether or not there is an empty game number and can be added. If the free game number FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of empty games FG is 0 or less, the process of setting an excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S2011, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The excess flag indicates a situation in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section cannot be increased, more specifically, the CPU 102 grasps a situation in which even if an increase is made, the additional games are not played due to forced termination at the 1500th game. is a flag for

By setting the excess flag, in the present embodiment, even if a specific role is won during the advantageous section, the execution of the lottery for adding the number of games during the AT mode is restricted. More specifically, for example, in step S914 and step S1101 in the AT mode game number addition lottery process, if the excess flag is set, the execution of the lottery process is restricted, and the extra lottery will not be won. (Or, even if you win, 0 games will be added). As a result, it is possible to suppress the misunderstanding that the advantageous section will continue for the upper limit number of games or more by adding to the amount that cannot be continued.

It should be noted that once the excess flag is set, the remaining game number management process may not be executed in the current advantageous section.

Returning to the description of the second section display process (FIG. 54), after executing the process of step S1903, the process for fixed RT is executed in step S1904. In the fixed RT process, it is determined whether or not a condition that allows the transition to the fourth RT state is satisfied, and based on the establishment of the condition, a flag for notification of transition to the fourth RT state (notification flag for transition) is set. processing. Such processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S1904 is executed, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the number of advantageous interval games AG has reached the upper limit value of "1500" in the current game. If it reaches "1500", the number of games in the advantageous section AG is cleared to 0 in step S1906, and then in step S1907 the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished as processing for ending the display of the section indicator. process to cause Then, after performing data initialization processing in step S1908, the second section display processing ends.

The data initialization process is a process of returning the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the current advantageous interval and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous interval to their initial values. For example, if a CZ mode winning flag, an AT mode winning flag, or the like is set at the time of transition to an advantageous section, or a VB mode winning flag is set during AT mode, and the flag remains set until this initialization process. clears these winning flags. Also, in the initialization processing, if the AT notification flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, special zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if the omen counter, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, etc. is greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S1905 that the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not reached the upper limit, the process advances to step S1909 to determine whether or not the advantageous interval has ended. That is, in step S1909, it is determined whether neither the CZ mode winning flag nor the AT mode winning flag is set, and in step S1910, neither the CZ mode flag nor the AT mode flag is set. state or not. Affirmative determination in both steps S1909 and S1910 means that the advantageous interval has ended before reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval. Along with clearing to 0, end processing of display of the section indicator is performed in step S1907, data initialization processing is performed in step S1908, and then section display second processing is terminated. If a negative determination is made in either step S1909 or step S1910, it is assumed that the current section is still in an advantageous section, and the second section display processing is terminated. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues.

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 56, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not lit) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, the pressing order notification effect is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to an advantageous section that has an instruction function such as the pressing order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if a lottery for transition to an advantageous section such as CZ mode or AT mode is won by winning a weak watermelon role, etc., the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established is set as the starting game. At the timing before the betting operation by the player is allowed in the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is lit, and the notification of the advantageous section is started.

In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon combination is won as described above, the game is in the state before transition to the advantageous section, and is included in the normal section. Then, regarding the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator indicating the advantageous interval, the notification of the advantageous interval is the timing at which the betting operation for the game following the starting game in which the weak watermelon role was won is permitted. In other words, if the game in which the advantageous section starts is considered to be played at the timing when the game becomes playable, as described above, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the weak watermelon role winning game (starting game). The notification can be said to be prior notification performed prior to the notification of the advantageous section (in-state notification, in-mode notification).

After that, in the situation where the advantageous section is being notified, the pressing order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. You can understand the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit and the final game of the advantageous interval is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also extinguished, and the notification of the advantageous interval ends. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted in games in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. Up to the game is the number of games in the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is finished in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

In this manner, the eighth display segment N8 is lit when the advantageous section is reached, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the advantageous section ends. Then, the eighth display segment N8 not only starts lighting based on the transition to the CZ mode, the AT mode, etc., but also based on winning the lottery for transition to the CZ mode, the AT mode, etc. Lighting starts. In other words, even if no notification is given in the game in which the lottery for transition to these modes has been won, whether or not the lottery for transition to these modes has been won can be determined by checking whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. can be clearly understood. By doing so, there is an advantage between players who end the game without knowing it even though they have won the lottery for transition to these modes, and the succeeding players who sit after that. It can be made so that there is no difference in degree.

In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value, regarding the game property of changing the degree of advantage by informing the pressing order of the CZ mode, the AT mode, or the like. Therefore, by making the playability based on the push order notification uniform for each game table (set value) and each game (situation), the advantage/disadvantage between players is eliminated, and the privilege is aimed at the pattern. While fully enjoying the original game property of the slot machine 10 of obtaining .

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification effect on the sub side, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S2102. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, or after the processing of step S2102 has been executed, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The betting time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed. In addition to the betting command set in step S207 of the normal processing, the mode transition notification processing (see 46), an AT mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like. In the case of these betting commands, a betting effect setting process is executed in step S2104.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, or if the process of step S2104 has been executed, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third special combination process (FIGS. 33 to 36), push order notification commands set in the push order process (FIG. 48), and the like. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S2106.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, or if the process of step S2106 has been executed, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S2108, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2107, or if the processing of step S2108 has been executed, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stopped command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, AT mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, CZ mode end command, AT mode end command, VB mode end command, special There are a zone end command, a first fixed RT start command, a second fixed RT start command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2110.

When a negative determination is made in step S2109, or after the processing of step S2110 is executed, other processing is executed in step S2111, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2111, setting effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main controller 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the time of start, the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described. Note that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects in FIGS. 67 to 73. FIG.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
The betting effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode start command is included in the betting time command received this time. When the CZ mode start command is included, in step S2202, processing for setting the CZ mode start effect is performed. In the CZ mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the characters "Chance zone start" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display mode to be changed is likely to win the AT mode change lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) that suggests the situation is performed. In addition, in the CZ mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a loud male voice saying "It's a chance!") is emitted.

If the CZ mode start command is not included in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the AT mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the AT mode winning notification command is included, in step S2204, the process of setting the AT mode winning notification effect is performed. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "AT confirmed". In addition, in the AT mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "I did it!") is emitted.

If the AT mode winning notification command is not included in step S2203, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S2206, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "V-BONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "super lucky!") is emitted.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2205, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the bonus winning notification command is included, in step S2208, a process of setting a bonus winning notification effect is performed. In the bonus-winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "You did it! Bonus confirmed". In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "I did it!") is emitted.

If the bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2207, it is determined in step S2209 whether or not the special zone winning notification command is included as the betting time command received this time. When the special zone winning notification command is included, in step S2210, a process of setting a special zone winning notification effect is performed. In the special zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "Ride on!". In addition, in the special zone winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a thick, ecstatic male voice, "Norinori!") is emitted.

After any one of steps S2202, S2204, S2206, S2208 and S2210 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S2209, other effects at the time of betting are set in step S2211. , the effect setting process is terminated. In the process of step S2211, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Alternatively, for example, processing for returning from the demo mode in which one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to inform that the operation is valid. processing, etc.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is normal mode, CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, and in the corresponding display mode , the display effect of the auxiliary display section 65 is set. Specifically, a CZ mode flag, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag are also set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side as flags for grasping the display mode. Areas are provided in which a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end of each mode. For example, the CZ mode flag is set in the setting processing of the CZ mode start effect in step S2202. In step S2301, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In subsequent step S2302, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S2303, processing for notification of pushing order is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2402.

In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2403, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the third replay win is established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 have not been won, it is determined in step S2404 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2405 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like to perform push order notification that the first replay win is established, and then finish the push order notification process. do.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the replays are not fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect or the specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2206 and the special zone winning notification effect in step S2210, the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 are notified that VB winning or special zone winning has been announced. set a flag. The alerted flag is cleared upon transition to the VB mode or specialized zone. Then, in step S2407, the presence or absence of the notified flag may be determined. If the VB mode or special zone winning announcement has been completed, in step S2408, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to announce the pressing order in which the 4th and 5th regame winnings are established. , terminates the pressing order notification process. If the notification of winning in the VB mode or the special zone has not been completed, the process advances to step S2405 to notify the pressing order for the first re-game winning, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2406 that the replay is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2409 whether or not the current lottery result is the BAR replay. In the case of BAR replay, it is determined in step S2410 whether or not the special zone winning notification effect has been executed. If it has already been announced that the special zone has been won, in step S2411, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform push order notification that the seventh regame win is established, and then the push order notification process is executed. finish. If the special zone winning notification has not been completed, the process advances to step S2403 to perform the pressing order notification for the third re-game winning prize, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2409 that it is not a BAR replay, it is determined in step S2412 whether or not the current lottery results are transition replays 1 and 2. If it is transition replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2413 whether or not a transition replay notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 or not. The transition replay notification flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the condition for allowing transition to the fourth RT state is satisfied. When the shift replay notification flag is set, in step S2414, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform the pressing order notification that the 11th and 12th regame winnings are established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. exit. When the shift replay notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2405, and after notification of the pressing order for the first replay winning prize is performed, the pressing order notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2412 that it is not transition replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2415 whether or not the current lottery result is Bell. If the bell is won, in step S2416, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to notify the pressing order that the bell wins as the first minor combination, and then the pressing order notification processing is terminated. . If a negative determination is made in step S2415, the pressing order notification process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 59), if it is determined in step S2302 that the push-up role is not won, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the transition opportunity role is won. If the transition opportunity is won, a process for notification of the transition opportunity is performed in step S2305. The transition trigger notification process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S2304, or after the processing of step S2303 or step S2305 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S2307, processing for setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As the additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted.

Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S2307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2501, a process of grasping the number of added games to be notified is performed based on the added command received this time. In the following step S2502, processing for grasping notification timing is executed. The notification timing is the timing for executing the additional effect, and the timing is determined by the process (additional notification process) on the side of the main controller 101 described above. Information on the determined timing is set in the above-mentioned add-on command and output. Therefore, on the side of the display control device 81, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the addition effect should be executed by reading the addition command. As the notification timing, a game in which an additional effect should be executed and a timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After grasping the notification timing in step S2502, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the result of grasping in step S2502 is that an additional effect is to be performed in the current game. The case where the addition notification is not performed in the current game is the case where the subsequent addition notification is selected, and in this case, the setting processing of the addition effect is finished as it is. If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2504 whether or not any of the reels is stopped and ON as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2505, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the additional effect. Further, in step S2505, the processing of reading out the performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games generated at the time of the stop ON operation from the performance data storage area 182b and temporarily storing the data in the predetermined performance data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional performance is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504, it is determined in step S2506 whether or not the first reel or the second reel is in the stop OFF operation. If these reels are to be stopped and turned off, in step S2507, the target reel for which the additional effect is to be generated is set so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is stopped and turned off. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. Also, in step S2507, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read out from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2506, in step S2508, setting is made so that the current additional effect is generated when all the reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also, in step S2508, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2505, step S2507 or step S2508, the setting processing of the additional effect is ended.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if the addition command is not received in step S2306, or after the process of step S2307 is executed, the effect setting process during the bonus is executed in step S2308, and the process proceeds to step S2309. Then, in step S2310, after setting other start effects, the start effect setting process is terminated. The during-bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S2310, for example, an effect indicating the lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or the lamp around the start lever 41 is extinguished to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stop operation performed in step S2108 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the process advances to step S2602 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and ON is set as the effect of the current game. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2603 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2604, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the stop ON operation effect is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the auxiliary display section 65 An additional production will occur. Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, a display is made in which the first reel as the operation target shown in FIG. 47(a) is displayed. . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 47(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, a display is made to indicate that the second reel is to be stopped as shown in FIG. When the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 47(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process advances to step S2605 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is finished.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, the process advances to step S2606 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2608, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect. If the determination in step S2605 is negative, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the currently received stop command includes a CZ mode end command. When the CZ mode end command is included, in step S2702, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the CZ mode end effect is performed. In the CZ mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Chance Zone End". In addition, in the CZ mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the end of the CZ mode (for example, a loud male voice saying "More diligence!").

If the CZ mode end command is not included in step S2701, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the AT mode start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the AT mode start command is included, in step S2704, a process of setting the AT mode start effect is performed. In the AT mode start rendering, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "AT start!! LV.1". In addition, in the AT mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "Let's go!") is emitted.

Incidentally, the display of "LV.1" in the AT mode start effect corresponds to the AT mode level. That is, the AT mode started this time is ATLV. This is a display indicating the 1 mode. The AT mode level is ATLV. When the mode is promoted to the 2nd mode (when the promotion command is received), the characters "LV.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as promotion effects. Also, the AT mode level is ATLV. 3 mode, the letters "LV.3" are displayed, and ATLV. When promoted to 4 mode, the characters "LV.4" are displayed.

If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2703, it is determined in step S2705 whether or not the AT mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. When the AT mode end command is included, in step S2706, processing for setting AT mode end effect is performed. In the AT mode ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the characters "AT END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the current AT mode (including the VB mode and the special zone) is displayed. , and the total number of payouts for the current AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the AT mode termination presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "see you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the AT mode end command is not included in step S2705, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. When the VB mode start command is included, in step S2708, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "777 Lucky!!". In addition, in the VB mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "bonus start!") is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2707, it is determined in step S2709 whether or not the VB mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the VB mode end command is included, in step S2710, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the characters "V-BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the AT mode continuation game at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of AT mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "It's still going on") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2709, it is determined in step S2711 whether or not the special zone start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the special zone start command is included, in step S2712, processing for setting the special zone start effect is performed. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Add Challenge!!" A character is displayed to indicate that In addition, in the special zone start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go" in a boy's voice) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2711, it is determined in step S2713 whether or not the special zone end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the special zone end command is included, in step S2714, processing for setting the special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end presentation, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. It is preferable to change the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2713, it is determined in step S2715 whether or not the bonus end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the bonus end command is included, in step S2716, processing for setting the bonus end effect is performed. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts obtained during the bonus, and if the bonus is shifted to AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, AT mode ( Display the total number of payouts for VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus ending effect, a character or the like suggesting these contents is produced depending on whether the AT mode is appropriate, whether the CZ mode is appropriate or not, and the number of additional games.

After any one of steps S2702, S2704, S2706, S2708, S2710, S2712, S2714, and S2716 is executed, or after a negative determination is made in step S2715, the process proceeds to step S2717. In step S2717, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S2307 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 61), when the generation timing of the additional effect of this time is set at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display portion 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Thereafter, in step S2718, fixed RT state notification processing is executed. The fixed RT state notification processing is processing for the fourth RT state, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S2719, after setting other effects at the time of stop, the main effect setting process is terminated. In step S2719, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, control is performed so that sound effects corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination are emitted from the speaker 64, and replaying is performed. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.例文帳に追加

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, the display control device 81 performs various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Production processing during various games>
In this embodiment, effects during bonuses and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. The effect during the bonus is a effect performed in each game during the bonus state that is shifted based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. A continuous effect is a effect that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, AT mode, CZ mode, VB mode, etc.), and the game is played multiple times (four times in this embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which it is notified whether or not the advantageous result was obtained in the final game.

<Bonus effect setting process>
First, the effect setting processing during bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The during-bonus effect setting process is a process executed in step S2308 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 59).

In the bonus effect setting process, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the game after winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB to the end of the bonus. The affirmative determination in step S2801 means that the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning has been established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2802, a process of grasping the bonus type of this time is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB winning or the second BB winning. Then, in step S2803, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type ascertained in step S2802 is set. When a negative determination is made in step S2801, or after the processing of step S2803 is executed, the during-bonus effect setting processing is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the contents of the bonus effect are different between the bonus game based on the 1st BB winning and the bonus game based on the 2nd BB winning to the extent that the player can distinguish between them. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the 1st BB winning, the auxiliary display section 65 is set with a bonus effect in which live-action moving image effects are performed, and in the bonus game based on the 2nd BB winning, the animation A bonus effect is set in which the effect is performed by. Also, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are different between the first BB and the second BB.

Both bonus effects are effects that are performed independently regardless of the progress of the game, and are set to be performed repeatedly as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a five-minute animation performance or animation performance is set as a unit performance, and when the unit performance ends after five minutes have passed since the start of the bonus performance, the unit performance is set to start again from the beginning. Note that the effect on the auxiliary display section 65 may be stopped at the screen at the end of the unit effect, and only the sound effect (song) may be repeated. Moreover, the effects on the auxiliary display section 65 may be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effects (songs) may be performed independently regardless of the progress of each game.

As described above, while the bonus effect based on the 1st BB win and the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB win can be identified, the game result that triggered the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win can be identified from the bonus effect. It is set to be impossible or difficult to identify. That is, regarding the bonus effect based on the 1BB winning, for example, the bonus effect is distinguished between the case of winning the 1BB with the opportunity of winning one special reply A and the case of winning the first BB with the opportunity of winning one special reply AB. Impossible or difficult to identify, more specifically, the same bonus effect is executed. In addition, the same applies to the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB winning. It is difficult, and the same bonus effect is executed.

<Processing for continuous production>
The outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 73(a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, four stages are displayed corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). It shows the daruma dropping performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the first daruma drop is successful, It indicates that the continuous production will continue). If the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect will end in the middle (for example, an effect that the daruma drop in the first step fails). ). The effects regarding whether or not to continue the continuous effects are the same in each game in the continuous effects.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining three daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the second daruma drop is successful, indicating that the continuous effect is continued). ).

As shown in FIG. 73(c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining two daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued. ).

As shown in FIG. 73(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, one-stage daruma dropping effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is given as to whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows the effect that the daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the previous game is inherited and the effect of the next game is set, and the effect of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize what game the current game is from the start of the continuous effect (how many games are there until the end of the continuous effect).

Here, in each game of the continuous effect, whether or not the continuous effect continues to the next game is set so that the continuation rate increases as the game of the continuous effect progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of continuous effects, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous effects will be reported, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be reported. Therefore, in the continuous effect, the player's level of interest greatly differs depending on what game the current game is in the continuous effect, and as the game progresses from the start game to the end game, the player's interest becomes high. .

Hereinafter, as the processing relating to the above-described continuous effect, the process for notifying a transition opportunity (step S2305) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2309) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 59) will be described.

<Transition trigger notification process>
65, first, in step S2901, a chance effect lottery process for determining whether or not to set a chance effect as the present game effect is executed. In the chance effect, as shown in FIG. 72(b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Chance!!" to correspond to and display each. In addition, in the chance presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "kyui") is emitted. In the chance effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that the chance effect occurs about half the time when the transition opportunity role is won. It should be noted that the winning probability of the chance effect lottery process may differ depending on the type of transition opportunity combination, display mode, game state, set value, and the like. In the subsequent step S2902, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2901 has been won. If the player wins, in step S2903, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of the current game.

Here, in the slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing a winning of each minor combination including the shift trigger combination will be described.

Among the winable hands in each game, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon are set as the so-called small winning combinations that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. . More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 28th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 28th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L, The 32nd to 35th minor symbol symbols are the “cherry” symbol and the “second replay” symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 28th minor symbol, the 32nd to 35th minor symbols, ie, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a strong cherry combination may be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 27th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 27th minor combination symbol, the 32nd minor combination symbol to the 32nd minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L. The 35 small combination symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 27th minor symbol, 32nd minor symbol to 35th minor symbol "Cherry" symbol and "2nd replay" symbol can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak cherry combination may be missed.

The strong watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 30th or 41st minor combination, and the 30th or 41st minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth “red 7” symbol to the third “white bell” symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 30th The minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 29th or 41st minor combination, and the 29th or 41st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the third "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The 29th minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon combination will be missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that can be missed, the fourth "cherry" symbol to the sixth "second replay" symbol are displayed on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when reaching the upper stage. In the following description, this operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a failure, and each operation mode that causes a failure is referred to as a non-specified operation. It is also called a mode (second operation mode).

In the chance effect set in step S2903, it is suggested that the winning combination of this time is one of the transition trigger roles, but it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which transition trigger role it is. It is That is, when the chance effect is performed, the winning combination of this game is likely to be either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., but it is either a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause any failure even if any of the transition timing combinations is won.

Further, the chance effect is not necessarily generated in the game in which the transition opportunity role is won, but is generated on the condition that the game is won in the chance effect lottery process (step S2901). Then, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode every game from the normal time so as not to miss the transition opportunity.

If a negative determination is made in step S2902, or if the process of step S2903 has been performed, the process advances to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not the current starting command includes a precursor command. If the portent command is not included, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the add-on command is included as the command at the start of this time. If the add-on command is not included, it is determined in step S2906 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, that is, if the lottery result is a transition trigger role such as a strong cherry or a weak watermelon, a lottery for transition to the CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode or addition of the number of continuous games If neither the lottery nor the bonus has been won, in step S2907, lottery processing in the pseudo-prediction mode is executed. The pseudo precursor mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the precursor mode. The pseudo precursor mode is a mode that ends without informing the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo precursor games.

In step S2907, a table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is acquired from the table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from the counter area 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether the pseudo-prediction mode is to be executed. conduct. In the table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of transition opportunity that has been won. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo omen mode is high.

In step S2908, based on the processing result of step S2907, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pseudo precursor mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S2909, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode is performed. This process corresponds to step S810 and the like on the main controller 101 side, and randomly determines the number of pseudo precursor games, which is 1 out of 1 to 20, by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the portent modes based on various winnings, the number of pseudo portent games is determined to be 20 games or less. Also, in the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games, 0 games are not selected. In subsequent step S2910, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2909 is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which 4 games are continuously produced, the continuous production is started in the game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and the result is notified in the game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when an omen mode or a pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode is terminated after a continuous effect. Then, in step S2910, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous production counter, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (remaining four games), the continuous production is started. It will happen.

In step S2911, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. In the following step S2912, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the transition trigger notification process is terminated. In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2904 to S2906, or when the negative determination is made in step S2908, the transition trigger role notification processing is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2309 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 59) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the start command currently received. When the precursor command is included, in step S3002, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command is input to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the omen mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. In step S3002, when the number of precursor games of the 1st to 3rd games is input to the continuous effect counter, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S3002, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the third game of the continuous effect shown in FIG. 73(c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when the winning notification of the AT mode or the like is performed without going through the precursor mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S3002, a continuous effect flag is set in step S3003.

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or if the process of step S3003 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, it is determined whether or not a continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S3005. Then, in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set in step S3007. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S3008 to acquire the present prognostic effect table from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3009, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the indication and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the present effect table for indication is effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends with success.

If it is determined in step S3007 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3010. In step S3010, a pseudo-prediction effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3011, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the pseudo precursor and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for the pseudo precursor is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that the continuous effect will not continue. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends in failure.

Incidentally, the effect data specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 includes data for which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data of the first game of effect is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second game of continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued to the next game in FIG. 73(b) is set. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the game in which the number of pseudo-prediction games in the pseudo-prediction mode is 0.

After performing the process of step S3009 or step S3011, it is determined whether the continuous production|presentation counter is 0 in step S3012. When the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S3013. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S3004, step S3006 or step S2912, or after performing the process of step S3013, this continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing is performed on the side of the main controller 101 based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are activated. When the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop, and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding combination is selected. In the configuration where benefits are granted, multiple infinite RT states with different replay probabilities are provided as a result of the lottery process, and the infinite RT state shifts when the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay win is established. . Whether or not the corresponding replay wins a prize is determined by the result of the lottery and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the order of operation is performed according to the result of the lottery process, and the transition of the display mode. It is done by winning the lottery. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to achieve the winning of the pressing order bell and obtain medals. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as an infinite RT state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to a display mode in which the operation order is notified, the replay probability is improved in the infinite RT state. The winning order of the bell can be established by pressing the bell, and a large amount of medals can be obtained.

As already explained, when the player shifts to, for example, the AT mode as a mode in which a large amount of medals can be obtained, the initial number of games (50) is set, and the AT mode can be played over the initial number of games. If an additional lottery is won in the AT mode or the like, the number of continuous games in the AT mode is added, and the number of games that can be played in the AT mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be obtained in the AT mode can also be increased.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, as a state in which the replay probability is improved, in addition to the infinite RT state such as the second RT state and the third RT state, a fourth RT state as a fixed RT state in which the number of executable games is predetermined is determined. States are provided (see FIG. 26). As already explained, in the 4th RT state, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won in the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state, stop in the operation order corresponding to the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win. The transition is made by operating the switches 42-44. In this embodiment, by shifting to the 4th RT state just before the end of the AT mode that becomes the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state, after the end of the AT mode, like the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state When falling replay winning To avoid a phenomenon in which a high RT state ends due to non-reporting of the pressing order, and to extend the high RT state.

First, the lottery table for the fourth RT state will be described with reference to FIG. The lottery table for the fourth RT state is a table selected based on the fact that the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S302 of the lottery process.

The fourth RT state lottery table differs from the other RT state lottery tables (see FIG. 22, etc.) in the point values PV of IV=1 to 14, and the same points are used in the other index values IV. A value PV is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 15 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in other RT states, and when IV = 1 The probability of winning is about 1/1.25, and no winning occurs when IV=2-14. That is, in the case of shifting to the fourth RT state, the odds of losing are lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, similar to the second RT state and the third RT state, which is advantageous to the player. The total replay probability of the fourth RT state is set to be the same as that of the second RT state and the third RT state. On the other hand, when moving to the 4th RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the fall replays 1 to 3, the second promotion replays 1 and 2, and the BAR replays 1 and 2, which are the triggers for the transition of the game state, are not won. The transition of the game state based on the replay winning prize does not occur. Also, as already explained, even if the number for transition is stopped in the fourth RT state, the transition to the first RT state does not occur. Then, the fourth RT state shifts to the normal game state by executing a predetermined number of games.

When the fourth RT state is played in the AT mode, an increase in medals similar to that in the second and third RT states can be expected, and more specifically, an increase of approximately 1.90 medals per game can be expected. On the other hand, if the fourth RT state is played in the normal mode, the number of medals that can be expected to increase is smaller than that in the case of playing the game in the AT mode, and an increase in medals cannot be expected. More specifically, a reduction of about 0.06 medals per game can be expected. In other words, if the 4th RT state is played in the normal mode, although an increase in medals cannot be expected, the decrease in medals is suppressed (no decrease), and the next AT mode winning or BB winning is achieved while suppressing the decrease in the number of medals held. It is possible to wait for Note that the number of medals increased when playing in the normal mode is the same in the fourth RT state, the second RT state, and the third RT state, and even in the second RT state and the third RT state, when playing in the normal mode, , is set so that neither increase nor decrease of medals occurs.

The number of games in the fourth RT state is set in step S519. Therefore, the fixed RT game count setting process performed in step S519 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the 11th re-game winning has been established. If the eleventh replay win has been established, in step S3102, the fixed RT game number counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to "50" as the number of games to be continued in the current fourth RT state. After executing the input process, the fixed RT game number setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that the 11th re-game winning has not been established, it means that the 12th re-game winning has been established. After executing the process of inputting "200" to the number counter as the number of games to be continued in the current fourth RT state, the fixed RT game number setting process is terminated.

The fixed RT game number counter input in steps S3102 and S3103 is decremented by one for each game by the subtraction processing in step S502. When the fixed RT game number counter becomes 0, the fourth RT setting flag is cleared in step S504, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

<Fixed RT processing>
Next, a description will be given of processing for causing a transition to the fourth RT state or preventing a transition to the fourth RT state during the AT mode. Such processing is provided as processing for fixed RT in step S1904 in the second section display processing (FIG. 54).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 76, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the AT notification flag is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the fact that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won is announced, and is cleared when the AT mode ends. The state in which the AT notification flag is set is the state in which the push order notification may occur. If the AT notification flag is not set, the fixed RT process is terminated. If the AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3202. It should be noted that, after the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state and the AT mode is started, the AT notification flag shifts to the BB state, or shifts to the 1st RT state before the AT mode ends due to an operation error or the like. Even if the transition is made, the AT notification flag is not cleared. Therefore, as described above, even if the state is shifted to the first RT state before the end of the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S3202.

In step S3202, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT mode games has reached 10 as a predetermined value. It should be noted that the predetermined value determined in step S3202 is a value smaller than the number of continuous games (50 or 200) when shifting to the fourth RT state. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, and the number of remaining AT mode games is more than 10, and the AT mode can still be continued, the fixed RT processing ends. When the number of remaining AT mode continuous games is 10 and the AT mode is approaching the final stage, the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, a process of setting a shift notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed. The notification flag for transition is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the transition to the fourth RT state is permitted. The shift notification flag is cleared when the AT mode ends. After executing the process of step S3203, in step S3204, the command for transition is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the process for fixed RT ends.

As already explained, the transition to the 4th RT state is made based on the transition replays 1 and 2 winning. If the 12 replay wins are matched, the transition to the fourth RT state occurs. Here, in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state in which the AT mode is mainly stayed, the winning probability of transition replays 1 and 2 is about 1/6.5 (FIGS. 24 and 25). Comparing the number (1/10) obtained by dividing 1 by 10, which is set as the predetermined value, and the winning probability of the transition replays 1 and 2, the winning probability of the transition replays 1 and 2 is higher. is a large value (high probability). Then, the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10, and one or more transition replays 1 and 2 are performed during the 10 games from when the notification flag for transition is set until the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0. It can be said that the predetermined value (10) for setting the winning probability of transition replays 1 and 2 and the notification flag for transition is set so that the winning can be expected.

<Fixed RT status notification process>
Next, processing related to the fixed RT state on the display control device 81 side will be described. As such processing, there is provided a fixed RT state notification processing in step S2718 in the effect setting processing at all stop (FIG. 63). As already explained, the all-stop effect setting process is a process executed based on the command for the all-stop effect from the main control device 101, and occurs when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. This is a process for effecting.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 77, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the transition command has been received and the end of the AT mode is approaching. If a transition command has been received, a process of setting a transition replay notification flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 is executed in step S3302. The transition replay notification flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that a transition command is being received from the main controller 101 . After that, in step S3303, processing for setting the first RT transition period effect is executed. In the 1st RT transition period effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "RT life extension chance", and when the AT mode ends, the infinite RT state (second RT state) is displayed. state and third RT state) are not terminated, but a display (for example, a female character display or an explanation) is provided to suggest that the high RT state itself can be extended by shifting to the fixed RT state. In addition, in the first RT transition period production, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "You can do it" in a gentle female voice) is emitted.

If a negative determination is made in step S3301, or if the processing of step S3303 has been executed, it is determined in step S3304 whether or not the AT mode has ended in the current game. When the AT mode ends, at step S3305, the process of clearing the transition replay notification flag is executed, and at step S3306, the process of setting the second RT transition period effect is executed. In the second RT transition period production, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "RT life extension chance, it will continue", and after the AT mode ends, the infinite RT state is displayed. (2nd RT state and 3rd RT state) before the end, display (e.g. male character display and explanatory text) suggesting that the high RT state itself can be extended by shifting to the fixed RT state )I do. In addition, in the second RT transition period production, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Don't give up, it's still okay" in a rough male voice) is emitted.

Here, the difference between the case where the first transition period effect is performed and the case where the second transition period effect is performed will be described. The case where the first transition period effect is performed is the case where the AT mode is about to end as described above, more specifically, the case where the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10. In this case, the transition replay notification flag is set, and if transition replays 1 and 2 are won in this situation (before the AT mode ends), an affirmative determination is made in step S2413 in the pressing order notification processing (FIG. 60). Then, in step S2414, the pressing order notification of the operation order in which the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize is established is generated. As a result, at the end of the AT mode, the RT state can be changed from the second RT state or the third RT state to the fourth RT state. In other words, when the first transition period effect is performed, although the AT mode ends after that, if the fall replay 1 or 2 is won before the end of the AT mode, the push order notification is generated and the state is shifted to the fixed RT state. Therefore, it is possible to continue the high RT state even after the AT mode ends. In this case, in the shift replay winning game, along with notification of the pushing order corresponding to the 11th replay winning or 12th replay winning, the 11th replay winning or 12th replay winning can be established. It is good to generate a congratulatory production. For example, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the character that appeared in the first RT transition period effect appears again on the auxiliary display unit 65 along with the pressing order notification effect, and the corresponding sound effect (for example, , in a gentle female voice, “Ikkee!!”).

On the other hand, the case where the second transition period effect is performed is the case where the AT mode ends as described above, and more specifically, when the AT mode ends, the pressing order notification effect does not occur from the next game. In this case, the transition replay notification flag is cleared. Then, if transition replays 1 and 2 are won in this situation, the push order notification command is not received from the main controller 101 either. The notification effect will not occur. In other words, when the second transition period effect is performed, although the AT mode has already ended, the transition replay is won before the fall replay winning/winning, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the transition replay winning game. It is a situation in which the high RT state can be continued if the order can match the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize. In this case, it is preferable to generate an effect informing that the 11th replay winning prize or the 12th replay winning prize can be established in the shift replay winning game. For example, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the pressing order as "???" Control so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a rough male voice saying "My voice is quite rough") is emitted.

If a negative determination is made in step S3304, or if the process of step S3306 has been executed, the process advances to step S3307. In step S3307, it is determined whether or not the first fixed RT start command has been received. The first fixed RT start command is when the 11th re-game winning or 12th re-game winning is established in the winning result handling process (FIG. 49) on the main control device 101 side, and the notification flag for transition is set. This is a command that is output when it is set (step S1524). When the first fixed RT start command has been received, processing for setting the first fixed RT start effect is performed in step S3308. In the first fixed RT start effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "RT life extension success!" description). In addition, in the first fixed RT start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "You did it, you can still do it") is emitted from the speaker 64 in a gentle voice.

After executing the process of step S3308, the process of setting the first fixed RT effect flag is executed in step S3309. This effect flag is referred to in the display mode setting process of step S2301 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 59). For example, when the first fixed RT effect flag is set, in step S2301, the content of the effect of the current game (for example, the background color of the auxiliary display section 65) is grasped to indicate that the current game is in the fourth RT state. Set as much as possible.

If a negative determination is made in step S3307, or if the process of step S3309 has been executed, the process advances to step S3310. In step S3310, it is determined whether or not the second fixed RT start command has been received. The second fixed RT start command is when the 11th re-game winning or 12th re-game winning is established in the winning result handling process (FIG. 49) on the main control device 101 side, and the notification flag for transition is set. This is a command output when not set (step S1525). Incidentally, the case where the transition notification flag is not set corresponds to before the transition notification flag is set or when the AT mode is not set, that is, mainly after the AT mode ends. If the second fixed RT start command has been received, it is determined in step S3311 whether or not the AT mode is being set. If it is in the AT mode, the fixed RT state notification processing is terminated. The affirmative determination in step S3311 means that the transition from the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state to the 4th RT state occurs during the AT mode (before the end stage transition notification flag is set). In this case, the replay probability itself does not change, and the presence/absence of push order notification does not change either, so the notification for that purpose is not performed.

If it is determined in step S3311 that the AT mode is not in progress, processing for setting the second fixed RT start effect is performed in step S3312. In the second fixed RT start effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters “Yay! display and explanation). In addition, in the second fixed RT start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a gentle male voice, "Yes!") is emitted.

After executing the process of step S3312, the process of setting the second fixed RT effect flag is executed in step S3313. This effect flag is referred to in the display mode setting process of step S2301 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 59). For example, when the second fixed RT effect flag is set, in step S2301, the content of the effect of the current game (for example, the background color of the auxiliary display section 65) is grasped to indicate that the current game is in the fourth RT state. It is an effect that makes it possible, and is set to a content that is different from the case where the first fixed RT effect flag is set to such an extent that the player can identify it. If a negative determination is made in step S3310, or if the process of step S3313 has been executed, the fixed RT state notification process ends.

<How the high RT state is extended>
How the high RT state is extended after the end of the AT mode by using the infinite RT state and the fixed RT state will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG.

First, the case where the AT mode ends without shifting to the fixed RT state (fourth RT state) will be described.

It is assumed that the transition replay 1 or the transition replay 2 is won at timing t1 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is more than 10 during the AT mode. In this case, since the transition notification flag is not set even during the AT mode, the pressing order notification for the fixed RT transition corresponding to the 11th regame winning prize and the 12th regame winning prize is not performed, and the first replay is not performed. Pressing order notification for no RT transition corresponding to game winning is performed. As a result, the RT state is maintained in the second RT state or the infinite RT state of the third RT state.

At the timing t2 when the number of AT mode remaining games reaches 10, a shift notification flag is set. By setting the notification flag for transition, the notification of the pressing order when winning the transition replay is switched from the notification of the pressing order without RT transition to the notification of the pressing order for fixed RT transition. However, in this example, transition replay winning does not occur in a situation where the notification flag for transition is set.

When the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0 at the timing of t3, the notification mode (display mode) shifts from the AT mode to the normal mode. Then, the transition notification flag is cleared, and even if the transition replay is won after that, the pressing order notification is not generated.

If any one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won at the timing of t4, the press order notification does not occur. A transition is made to the normal RT state of the first RT state.

Next, the case of shifting to the fourth RT state at the end of the AT mode will be described.

Even if either transition replay 1 or 2 is won at timing t5 when the AT mode is in progress and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is greater than 10, the timing is the same as timing t1. , the pressing order notification for non-RT transition is performed instead of the pressing order notification for fixed RT transition. As a result, the RT state is maintained in the second RT state or the infinite RT state of the third RT state. After that, when the number of remaining AT mode games reaches 10 at the timing of t6, the shift notification flag is set.

If either transition replay 1 or 2 is won at timing t7, which is the situation in which the notification flag for transition is set, notification of pressing order for transition to fixed RT is generated. As a result, the RT state can be changed to the fixed RT state (fourth RT state) by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the order according to the pressing order notification.

When the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0 at timing t8, the notification mode (display mode) shifts from the AT mode to the normal mode. However, in the fourth RT state, it is set so as not to win Fall Replays 1 to 3, and the RT state continues until timing t10 when a predetermined number of games (50 or 200) are completed. In this case, the high RT state is extended from the timing t9 corresponding to the timing t4 at which the transition to the normal RT state (first RT state) occurs in FIG.

Next, the case of shifting to the fourth RT state after the end of the AT mode will be described.

When the number of remaining AT mode games reaches 10 at the timing of t11, a shift notification flag is set. This example shows a case where the transfer replay is not won by the end of the AT mode. That is, the shift replay is not won by the timing t12 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0, and the shift notification flag is cleared as it is.

As already explained, even after the end of the AT mode, the second RT state and the third RT state continue until the second regame winning is established. At the timing of t13, the transition replay is won before the second re-game winning is established, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the stop order corresponding to the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning. indicates the case. In this case, the RT state shifts to the fixed RT state, and the high RT state is extended by the predetermined number of games in the fixed RT state from the game in which the shift is successful (until timing t14).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the remaining AT mode number of games reaches 10, a shift notification flag is set, and a state is entered in which push order notification for transition to the fixed RT state can occur when a transition replay win is made. By doing so, it is possible to shift to the fixed RT state in which the number of games greater than the number of remaining games in the AT mode is set as the specified number of games. Therefore, after the AT mode ends, it is possible to extend the high RT state, and it is possible to improve the playability of the AT mode and the accompanying game without increasing the advantage of the AT mode too much.

Here, the transition to the fixed RT state can occur on the condition that the transition replay is won after the transition notification flag is set. and does not cause a transition to the fixed RT state. By doing so, after the notification flag for transition is set, that is, at the end of the AT mode, attention is paid to whether or not the transition replay is won, and the gameplay at the end of the AT mode is dramatically enhanced. be done. Moreover, since it is linked to the lottery result of each game, in the final game of the AT mode, the operation of the start lever 41 is put into action every game, making it possible to provide a strong thrilling feeling.

The winning probability of transition replays 1 and 2 and the transition notification flag are set so that one or more transition replays 1 and 2 can be expected to win in the game from when the transition notification flag is set until the end of the AT mode. is set (the number of games). By doing so, in the final stage of the AT mode, unless the game is very unlucky, the game can be expected to transition to the fixed RT state. In other words, basically, a game can be played on the premise that a transition to the fixed RT state will occur, and through the continuation of the fixed RT state even after the AT mode ends, the feeling of disappearance when the AT mode ends Also, it is possible to soften the sense of accomplishment and motivate the player to continue playing the game after the AT mode ends.

Transition replays 1 and 2 are set as not only the 11th replay and the 12th replay in which the transition to the fixed RT state occurs, but also the second replay in which the fall to the 1st RT state occurs. Depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 when transition replays 1 and 2 are won, not the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win but the 2nd replay win can be established. By doing so, the degree of attention when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won is increased by requiring a more careful stop operation when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won.

Further, transition replays 1 and 2 are set as overlapping roles not only for the 11th replay and the 12th regame in which transition to the fixed RT state occurs, but also for the 1st replay in which the RT state transition does not occur. Depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 when transition replays 1 and 2 are won, not the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win but the 1st replay win can be established. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the transition to the fixed RT state when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won before the end of the AT mode, that is, before the transition notification flag is set. It is possible to avoid.

Even if a transition to the fixed RT state occurs in the final stage of the AT mode, the number of remaining games in the AT mode itself is taken over. That is, the AT mode itself ends when the number of remaining games is completed regardless of the types of high RT states (second RT state to fourth RT state). In this way, after the transition notification flag is set, if the state is shifted to the fixed RT state early, the benefit of the AT mode will not be eroded, and the extension of the high RT state will not occur. The only difference is the length of . Therefore, it is possible to purely enjoy the game property of extending the high RT state without impairing the enjoyment of the AT mode.

Even if the AT mode ends in the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state, the high RT state continues until the second replay winning prize is established, but the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state after the end of the AT mode. When transition replay is won in the state (return section), if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 by the player matches the 11th regame winning prize or the 12th regame winning prize, the state is shifted to the fixed RT state. It is possible. In other words, it can be said that the high RT state is allowed to be extended after the AT mode ends and until the high RT state ends. By doing so, it is also possible to improve the playability of the AT mode and the accompanying game without increasing the advantage of the AT mode too much.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, a case where the 11th regame winning prize or the 12th regame winning prize is established and the transition to the fixed RT state occurs before the transition notification flag is set in the AT mode will be described. First, based on the timing charts of FIGS. 83 and 84, a description will be given of the situation when the transition to the fixed RT state occurs.

It is assumed that the transition replay 1 or the transition replay 2 is won at the timing t15 when the AT mode is in progress and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is more than 10. In this case, since the transition notification flag is not set even in the AT mode, the pressing order notification for fixed RT transition is not performed, and the pressing order notification for non-RT transition is performed. However, the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated is up to the player. A scene in which operations are performed in a different order of operation is also conceivable. For example, at the timing of t15, it is assumed that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 11th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning even though the press order notification for no RT transition is being performed. In this case, although the number of remaining AT mode games is more than 10, a transition to the fixed RT state occurs.

For example, FIG. 83 shows a scene where the number of games that can be completed in the fixed RT state is greater than the number of remaining AT mode games at the timing of t15.

In this case, at time t16, the number of remaining AT mode games becomes 10, the transition notification flag is set, and at time t17, the number of remaining AT mode games becomes 0, and the AT mode ends. remains in the fixed RT state. As described above, since the number of remaining AT mode games at the time of transition to the fixed RT state is smaller than the number of games that can be completed in the fixed RT state, the timing of t18, which is the timing after the timing of t17, is reached. The fixed RT state continues until In this case, at least, the AT mode can be implemented under a high RT state, and the player can expect an increase in medals by notifying the pushing order bell of the pushing order bell while suppressing the reduction of the medals held by the high RT state. I have fully enjoyed the benefits of mods.

On the other hand, FIG. 84 shows a scene in which a transition to the fixed RT state occurs at timing t19, when the number of remaining AT mode games is greater than the number of games that can be completed in the fixed RT state.

In this case, the fixed RT state shifted at the timing of t19 ends at the timing of t20, which is still in the AT mode. That is, at the timing of t20, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and becomes a low RT state (normal RT state) with a low replay probability. After that, even if it shifts to the second RT state (high RT state) due to the pushing order notification at the time of winning the first promotion replay 1-2 at the timing of t21, the game at least from the timing of t20 to the timing of t21 , is digested in the low RT state, resulting in a situation in which the benefits of the AT mode cannot be enjoyed. Therefore, in this modified example, such a scene is notified to the player.

After the transition to the high RT state at the timing of t21, the notification flag for transition is set at the timing of t22, the AT mode ends at the timing of t23, and the second replay wins at the timing of t24. ends the high RT state.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing fixed RT state notification processing in this modification.

The processing of steps S3401 to S3413 is the same as the processing of steps S3301 to S3313, and when the number of remaining AT mode games reaches 10, the transition replay notification flag is set and the first RT transition period effect is set. When the AT mode ends, the second RT transition period effect is set. In addition, when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is between 0 and 10 and the transition to the fixed RT state occurs, the first fixed RT start effect is set, and the transition to the fixed RT state occurs after the end of the AT mode. If so, the second fixed RT start effect is set.

In this modified example, the processing is different when a shift to the fixed RT state occurs in the AT mode. That is, if it is determined in step S3411 that it is in the AT mode, in this modification, the process proceeds to step S3414, and the number of games that can be performed in the fixed RT state to be shifted this time and the number of remaining games in AT mode are compared. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state is equal to or greater than the number of remaining games in the AT mode. That is, it is determined whether the transition to the fixed RT state this time is the scene of FIG. 83 or the scene of FIG. When it is determined that the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state is equal to or greater than the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and that the scene in FIG. Without doing so, the fixed RT state notification processing ends.

If it is determined in step S3414 that the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state is less than the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and the scene of FIG. 84 is determined, the third fixed RT start effect is set in step S3415 process. In the third fixed RT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. A display (for example, a dejected male character display or an explanation) is provided to suggest that an indispensable scene may occur. In addition, in the third fixed RT start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a panicked male voice, "Dangerous, dangerous") is emitted.

After executing the process of step S3415, after executing the process of setting the third RT effect flag in step S3416, the fixed RT state notification process ends. For example, when the third fixed RT effect flag is set, in the above step S2301, the effect content of the current game (for example, the background color of the auxiliary display unit 65) is set to AT in the current or future low RT state. It is an effect that makes it possible to grasp that the mode is completed, and it is different from the case where the first fixed RT effect flag and the second fixed RT effect flag are set, and it is different to the extent that the player can identify it. settings. Then, for example, after the fixed RT state ends and the state shifts to the low RT state, the first promotion replay 1, 2 is won, and the third replay winning prize is established. As shown in b), it is preferable to have a configuration in which a character display of "Returning from RT" is displayed together with the pressing order notification effect. By doing so, the player can clearly grasp that the disadvantage is caused by causing the transition to the fixed RT state before the first RT transition period effect is generated. , it is possible to increase the willingness to play, such as trying to make up for the disadvantage in future games. It is also possible to urge the user to play a game with.

It should be noted that, in Modification 1 above, as changes in processing and configuration from the first embodiment, in particular, the configuration of the fixed RT state notification processing and the content of effects have been described, but the configuration other than that has been described in the above modifications. It is preferable to make appropriate corrections according to the changes in the processing and configuration described in Example 1. For example, after the fixed RT state started in the third fixed RT start effect is completed, when the state returns from the low RT state to the high RT state, the low RT may When the state is shifted to the high RT state, the effect may be different from the effect when returning to the high RT state. Depending on the presence or absence of the RT effect flag, the effect may be changed as described above. The same applies to the following modified examples and embodiments as well.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, a modified example will be described in which the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state is equal to or greater than the number of remaining games in the AT mode.

As already explained, it is possible to extend the high RT state by causing the transition to the fixed RT state after the number of remaining AT mode games reaches 10 and the transition replay notification flag is set. Also, even in the scene of FIG. 83, the high RT state continues at least until the end of the AT mode, so it is possible to fully enjoy the benefits of the AT mode. However, even in these situations, there may be a difference in the degree of advantage for the player depending on the number of games in which the transition to the fixed RT state occurs.

That is, as shown in FIG. 87(b), in the scene (1) in which the push order notification can occur in the AT mode, the shift replay is won and the shift to the fixed RT state occurs, and the push order When compared with the case where the transition replay is won in the scene (2) after (1) in the state where the notification can occur and the transition to the fixed RT state occurs, (1) fixed RT The high RT state continues longer in the fixed RT state of (2) than in the state. That is, the extension of the high RT state is longer in case (2) than in case (1). In that case, it can be said that it is more advantageous to cause the transition to the fixed RT state at the end of the AT mode.

On the other hand, the transition to the fixed RT state can occur by winning transition replays 1 and 2. There may also be situations where you are not elected. Then, for example, when the transition replay is won in the scene (3) after the AT mode ends, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game succeeds in causing the transition to the fixed RT state. However, it is also possible that the second replay win will be established and the high RT state will end.

Therefore, in this modified example, the player is allowed to select whether or not to cause the transition to the fixed RT state while taking into consideration the difference in the degree of advantage due to the number of remaining AT mode games when the transition replay is won. is performed in the transition replay winning game. For example, as shown in FIG. 87(a), in the transitional replay winning game, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Choose Fate!!" or a transition to a fixed RT state or a transition to a low RT state will not occur. In this case, notifying the number of remaining AT mode games (displayed as "remaining 8G" in the figure) helps the player to consider the difference in the degree of advantage due to the remaining number of AT mode games.

1st replay, 11th replay, and 12th replay are set as the winning combination in the case of winning with the index value IV=13, 14 corresponding to the shift replay, and the 2nd replay is not set. You may do so. That is, depending on the order of operations when winning a transition replay, either a transition to the fixed RT state occurs or a transition to the RT state does not occur, and a transition to the low RT state is prevented. good too. In this case, it is possible to further simplify the operation sequence when winning the transition replay, and as shown in FIG. By stopping, the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning is established, so that either the left or the right can be selected in an easy-to-understand manner, and the improvement of the player's understanding of the game can be expected.

Incidentally, a specific configuration of the operation sequence corresponding to each replay when winning the shift replay is as follows, for example. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the order of left→middle→right and left→right→middle, the first replay prize is established, right→middle→left and right. When the stop operation is performed in the order of →left →middle, the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning is established. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the order of center → left → right, the first regame winning is established, and when the stop operation is performed in the order of center → right → left, the 11th regame winning or the 12th replay winning is established. A game prize is established.

In addition, the transition replay in which the operation order and the winning mode are set such that either left or right can be selected is provided separately from the transition replays 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, and these can coexist. may be configured.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the transition to the fixed RT state is caused by considering the post-loading notification. First, with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 88, the post-loading notification process will be described. The post-addition notification process is a process executed in step S1502 in the winning result handling process (FIG. 49) by main controller 101. FIG.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, thereby determining whether or not the current display mode is AT mode, VB mode, or special zone. judge. If the mode is not one of these modes, the post-addition notification process is terminated. If the mode is any one of the AT mode, VB mode, and special zone, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the player is in the bonus state. In the case of either the BB state based on the first BB or the second BB or the CB state based on the CB, the post-addition notification processing is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3502, the flow advances to step S3503 to perform subtraction processing for the display remaining number counter HG. In this case, in step S3503, a command including the value after subtraction of the display remaining number counter HG is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received such a command controls the auxiliary display section 65 so as to update the display of the number of remaining games ZGP. The display control device 81 may be provided with a counter or the like corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG, and the display control device 81 may perform processing for updating the remaining game number display ZGP.

In step S3504, as a result of processing in step S3503, it is determined whether or not the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined value (1) that triggers a post-addition notification. If the value does not reach the predetermined value, the post-addition notification process is terminated. If the predetermined value is reached, it is determined in step S3505 whether or not the post-loading flag is set. If the post-boarding flag is not set, the post-boarding notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3505 that the post-loading flag is set, the process advances to step S3506. In step S3506, the value of the trailing counter BG is grasped. Then, in step S3507, a process of setting an add-on command is performed so that an add-on notification corresponding to the value of the add-on counter BG is performed. The add-on command in this case includes information that an add-on notification is performed in the game and information that an add-on of the number of games corresponding to the value of the add-on counter BG is performed. It should be noted that it is also possible to add a part of the post-loading counter BG. It is preferable to set the information that is performed in the superposition command.

In subsequent step S3508, a process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of additional games set in the additional command in step S3507 from the additional counter BG is performed. Then, in step S3509, it is determined whether or not the post-loading counter BG has become 0 as a result of the processing in step S3508. If it is not 0, the post-addition notification process is terminated. If it is 0, the process for clearing the post-loading flag is performed in step S3510, and then the post-loading notification process is terminated.

As described above, the add-on command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in the add-on notification process in the winning result handling process. As already explained, in the display control device 81, the processing for performing the additional notification effect is executed in the additional notification processing of the effect setting processing at the time of all stop. As a result, in the game in which the display remaining number counter HG reaches the predetermined value, the additional information is executed as the additional information after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. Therefore, in a game in which the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value (1), regardless of the winning result of the game, while expecting that an additional notification (post-addition notification) will be performed, A stop OFF operation is performed.

Incidentally, the third reel stop OFF operation of the timing of the additional information selected in the case of performing the immediate information can be different timing from the time of full stop in the case of performing the subsequent information. That is, the time of the third reel stop OFF operation is the timing when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed, and if the corresponding reel may stop at that timing, the timing is slightly delayed due to the slip control. In some cases, the corresponding reel stops. Therefore, the third reel stop OFF operation can be slightly earlier than the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. On the other hand, the execution timing of the post-addition notification set in the post-addition notification processing in the winning result handling processing is the timing after the winning result handling processing is executed, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are complete. It is the timing after the medal is paid out (after the payout determination process of step S413 is executed) if a minor win has occurred. Therefore, the timing at which the post-boarding notification is executed can be a timing later than the third reel stop OFF operation in the immediate boarding notification.

Next, fixed RT processing in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If it is not set, the fixed RT processing is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the display remaining number counter HG is 10, and the display of the number of remaining games in the AT mode is apparently 10 games. If the display remaining number counter HG is not 10, the fixed RT processing ends. If the display remaining number counter HG is 10, the process proceeds to step S3603.

In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the post-addition flag is set. If the trailing flag is not set, it means that the trailing counter BG is 0 and the value of the display remaining number counter HG is equal to the actual number of AT mode remaining games. In this case, the transition notification flag is set in step S3604, and the transition command is set to be output in step S3605, after which the fixed RT process ends. By setting the notification flag for transition, the pressing order notification for transition to fixed RT is generated at the time of winning the transition replay, and the first transition period effect is generated by outputting the command for transition. As already explained.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603 and the post-loading flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3606. In step S3606, a process of setting a notification flag for pseudo transition to the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The notification flag for pseudo transition is a flag for the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 to recognize that an effect for the transition replay is won in a situation where the subsequent notification can occur. After executing the process of step S3606, the command for pseudo transition is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S3607, and then the process for fixed RT ends. The display control device 81 that has received the pseudo-transition command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to generate the first transition period effect, as in the case of receiving the transition command.

Next, the pushing runner-up process in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this modification, generally, the process is different when winning the transition replay under the condition that the notification flag for transition during the AT mode is not set. That is, the processing of steps S3701 to S3723 is the same as the processing of steps S1301 to S1323, and the processing when a negative determination is made in step S3721 is different.

Specifically, it is determined in step S3719 that the transition replay has been won, and in step S3720 it is determined that the AT notification flag is set, and in step S3721 the transition notification flag is set. If it is determined that there is not, in this modification, the process proceeds to step S3728. In step S3728, it is determined whether or not the notification flag for pseudo-transition set in step S3606 is set. When the notification flag for pseudo transition is set, the value of the display remaining number counter HG becomes 10 in the situation where the post-loading flag is set, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10 visually. This is the case where the first transition period effect occurs and the transition replay win is made. In other words, the AT mode is not actually nearing its final stage, and the player may be disadvantaged if the mode is shifted to the fixed RT state (see Modification 2 above).

In this case, in this modified example, a so-called freeze effect for temporarily restricting the progress of the game is generated. That is, if it is determined in step S3728 that the notification flag for pseudo shift is set, the flow advances to step S3729 to execute freeze timing lottery processing. In the freeze timing lottery process, the generation timing of the freeze effect is randomly selected according to the number of AT mode games that can be reported by the post-loading notification. More specifically, a post-loading counter BG and a lottery counter are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a freeze timing table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and freezing is performed according to the value of the post-loading counter BG. The timing will be determined by lottery. In the freeze timing table, as shown in FIG. 91, as the freeze timing, the time of the first stop ON operation, the time of the second stop ON operation, and the time of the third stop ON operation are set. Depending on the distribution ratio, it is determined at which operation the freeze will occur. Then, it is set such that the greater the value of the trailing counter BG, the easier it is to select the rear side operation than the front side operation.

After executing the freeze timing lottery process in step S3729, in step S3730, the process of setting a freeze flag corresponding to the lottery result in step S3729 is executed in the various flag storage area 106d. Specifically, if the lottery result in step S3729 is the first stop ON operation, the first stop ON freeze flag is set, and if the lottery result is the second stop ON operation, the second stop ON freeze flag is set. is set, and if the result of the lottery is the time of the third stop ON operation, the freeze flag at the time of the third stop ON is set.

When it is determined in step S3728 that the notification flag for pseudo transition is not set, or after executing the process of step S3730, the process proceeds to step S3707 for performing the pressing order notification for the first replay.

In this case, the push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 when the pseudo-transition notification flag is set and the push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 when the pseudo-transition notification flag is not set are both the first. 1 They are common in that they notify the pressing order for replay winning. On the other hand, the effect contents including the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the notification flag for pseudo transition is set, and the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the notification flag for pseudo transition is not set More specifically, the effect content including the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo transition notification flag is not set is the transition notification flag is not set. The effect content for the first re-game winning including the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 in the case is common, and the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the notification flag for pseudo transition is set. The effect contents including are common to the effect contents for the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the notification flag for transition is set, and only the order of pressing order notification is It is announced as the one for the first regame winning prize. In other words, when transition replay is won in a situation where the notification flag for pseudo transition is set, although the operation order for the first re-game winning is notified as the push order notification and the push order notification effect, the transition notification It is difficult to distinguish the case where the transition replay is won in a situation where the flag is set, from the effect contents of the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

The freeze processing in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. The freeze processing is performed by setting a stop command command in step S405 when it is determined in step S404 that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated in the reel control processing (FIG. 18) by the main controller 101. It is the processing performed before. It should be noted that this freezing process may be configured to be performed during the invalid period of each of the stop switches 42-44.

In step S3801, it is determined whether or not the current stop operation was the first stop ON operation. If it is the first stop ON operation, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the first stop ON freeze flag is set. If it is not set, the freeze processing is terminated. If it is set, freeze processing is executed in step S3803. The freeze process is a process of temporarily disabling the operation of the other stop switches 42 to 44 without stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R. That is, the freeze process temporarily restricts the progress of the normal game, such as stopping the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42-44.

After executing the freeze process in step S3803, the process of setting the special effect command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3804. The special effect command is a command for generating an effect corresponding to the freeze process. In the display control device 81, based on the reception of the special effect command, the special effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker. 64 or the like. After that, in steps S3805 to S3808, processing for generating a post-boarding notification is executed. That is, in step S3805, an add-on command corresponding to the post-add counter BG is set, and in step S3806, subtraction processing of the post-add counter BG is executed. In step S3807, it is determined whether or not the post-loading counter BG has reached 0. If it has become 0, processing for clearing the post-loading flag is executed in step S3808. If it is not 0, the freezing process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3801, the process advances to step S3809 to determine whether or not the current stop operation was the second stop ON operation. If it is the second stop ON operation, it is determined in step S3810 whether or not the second stop ON freeze flag is set. If the second stop ON freeze flag is not set, the freeze processing is terminated. If the second stop ON freeze flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3803 to perform processing for generating a freeze effect, a special effect, and an additional notification.

If a negative determination is made in step S3809, the process advances to step S3811 to determine whether or not the current stop operation was the third stop ON operation. If it is the third stop ON operation, it is determined in step S3812 whether or not the third stop ON freeze flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S3811 (if the stop operation this time is one of the stop OFF operations) or if the third stop ON freeze flag is not set, the freeze processing ends. If the third stop ON freeze flag is set in step S3812, the process advances to step S3803 to perform processing for generating a freeze effect, a special effect, and an additional notification.

How the freeze effect occurs and the special effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 shows a freeze effect and a special effect when the second stop ON freeze flag is set.

As shown in FIG. 93(a), for example, in a situation where the middle reel 32M as the first stop reel is stopped, the right stop switch 44 is turned on to stop the right reel 32R as the second stop reel. Suppose In this case, the stop control of the right reel 32R is limited based on the stop ON operation of the right stop switch 44 because the second stop ON freeze flag is set as described above. Further, in this case, the stop control of the left reel 32L based on the stop ON operation of the left stop switch 42 is also limited, and a so-called freeze effect occurs.

In the auxiliary display part 65 and the speaker 64, a special effect is produced in correspondence with the freeze effect. In the special effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 93(b), a male character engulfed in flames is displayed, and the male character shouts, "What you were seeing was nothing more than an illusion!" is emitted from the speaker 64, and it is explained that the display up to that point, that is, the first transition period effect and the press order notification for causing the transition to the fixed RT state were pseudo displays. be. In addition, it is preferable that the words are also displayed in characters on the auxiliary display section 65 . The special effect is executed over the period during which the freeze effect is performed, that is, the period during which the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42-44 is limited. When the stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the stop operation is resumed, the special effect ends, and the above-described additional notification is generated (additional notification effect is generated). A player can grasp that a special effect will occur through the restriction of the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, with the special effect, although it was attempted to shift to the fixed RT state based on the transition replay winning, it is possible to grasp that the situation should not be shifted to the fixed RT state, that is, that the AT mode will continue, In addition, instead of establishing the 11th regame winning prize or the 12th regame winning prize and shifting to the fixed RT state, the 1st regame winning prize can be established and the infinite RT state can be maintained. Moreover, at the same time, the AT mode is added (post-added).

Thus, in this modification, while utilizing the configuration for shifting to the fixed RT state just before the end of the AT mode, the configuration is such that the above-mentioned special effect can occur due to the relationship with the post-boarding notification, so that the AT mode is activated. The disappointment of ending the game can be changed to the joy of continuing the AT mode, and furthermore, the production can provide intense excitement such as being notified of the number of continuations of the AT mode.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state (fourth RT state) is determined by lottery. FIG. 94(a) is a flow chart showing the fixed number of RT games setting process in this modified example.

In step S3901, the fixed RT game number table stored in the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is obtained. As shown in FIG. 94(b), the fixed RT game number table is set so that the number of games that can be executed in the fixed RT state differs depending on the set value for changing the increase/decrease rate and increase/decrease mode of the game medium. . More specifically, the selection rate is set so that one of the plurality of game types, 50 games, 100 games, and 200 games, is selected for each set value of six stages, which is a plurality of stages. For example, settings 1, 3, 5, and 6 may select 200 games, while settings 2 and 4 do not select 200 games. Also, the selection rates of several types of games are set so that the selection rate of 50 games is the highest for settings 1 and 3, while the selection rate of 100 games is the highest for settings 2 and 4. Setting 2 is better than setting 1, setting 3 is better than setting 2, and so on.

After acquiring the fixed RT game number table in step S3901, game number lottery processing is executed based on the game number table in step S3902. Then, in step S3903, a process of inputting the number of games corresponding to the lottery result to the fixed RT game number counter is executed, and then the fixed RT game number setting process is terminated.

As described above, by allowing the number of games in the RT state after the end of the AT mode to vary depending on the set value, the amount of game media increases or decreases according to the set value in a range unrelated to the continuation rate of the AT mode. Differences in rates and increments and decrements can be realized. Therefore, while reducing or eliminating the setting difference in the game property aiming to win medals by the AT mode push order notification, the game property and the game property aiming to win medals by bonuses such as the 1st BB and the 2nd BB It is possible to finely adjust the balance of

<Modification 5>
In this modification, when the AT mode is shifted to in the fixed RT mode, the number of continuations of the AT mode is changed. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the counting start process of the number of AT mode continuations in this modification. The count start process is a process executed in step S1508 when the third replay win is established under the condition that the AT notification flag is set in the winning result handling process (FIG. 49). Incidentally, in the above-described first embodiment, a uniform initial value (50) is input to the AT mode continuation counters provided in the various counter areas 106e, and counting is started with the AT mode continuation number being 50 games.

In this modification, in step S4001, the number-of-initial-games lottery process is executed. In the initial game number lottery process, the AT mode game number table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and one game number is selected from among a plurality of types of game numbers. is selected, and set as the initial value of the number of continuations of the AT mode to be started this time. For example, 50 games and 100 games are set as a plurality of types of game numbers. For example, 50 games are selected at 90% and 100 games are selected at 10%. In this case, it is preferable that the selectivity is set so as not to cause a difference due to the setting value. After executing the lottery process for the number of initial games, in step S4002, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the lottery result to the AT mode continuation counter is executed.

In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a fixed RT state such as the fourth RT state. If it is not in the fixed RT state, the count start processing is terminated. In this case, the AT mode is started with the number of games corresponding to the value input in step S4002 as the initial number of games.

If it is determined in step S4003 that it is in the fixed RT state, the process proceeds to step S4004. In step S4004, the number of remaining games in the fixed RT state is grasped from the fixed RT game number counter. Then, in step S4005, a value corresponding to the number of remaining games in the fixed RT state is added to the AT mode continuation counter, and then this count start processing ends. In this case, the AT mode is started in which the number of games obtained by adding the number of remaining games in the fixed RT state to the value input in step S4002 is set as the initial number of games.

As described above, in this modified example, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won during the fixed RT state, the number of remaining games in the fixed RT state is taken into account to set the initial number of AT mode games. , the benefit of the fixed RT state can be thoroughly enjoyed regardless of the winning timing of the AT mode transition lottery, and the game performance in the fixed RT state is improved. That is, for example, in a configuration in which the number of remaining games in the fixed RT state is not considered in the AT mode, if a lottery for switching to the AT mode is won immediately after the transition to the fixed RT state, the number of remaining games in the fixed RT state It is conceivable that there are some players who cannot enjoy the benefits of the bonus, and even though they have won the lottery for switching to the AT mode, they feel that they have lost the draw. In this regard, by doing as described above, it is possible to fully enjoy the AT mode lottery during the fixed RT state, and it is possible to suitably realize the continuous property of the AT mode through the fixed RT state.

<Modification 6>
In this modification, the transition route to the fixed RT state is different from that in the first embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the transition route of the game state in this modified example.

In this modification, the fourth RT state, which is the fixed RT state, can be shifted from the third RT state, and cannot be shifted from the first RT state, the second RT state, and the normal game state. That is, in the first embodiment, the configuration allows transition from the second RT state and the third RT state to the fourth RT state, but in this modified example, the configuration prohibits the transition from the second RT state.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for the second RT state in this modified example. Compared to the lottery table in the first embodiment, the point value PV of index values IV=13 and 14 is set to 0, and in the second RT state, it is set so that transition replays 1 and 2 are not won. there is Note that the point values of the index values IV=13 and 14 are added to the index values IV=6 to 10, respectively, and the total replay probability in the second RT state is the same as that of the first embodiment. have the same probability.

The lottery table for the third RT state in this modified example is the same as that in the first embodiment. If it corresponds to the re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning, the game state shifts to the 4th RT state.

That is, in this modified example, although the AT mode causes the transition to the second RT state, the transition to the fixed RT state does not occur when the AT mode ends in the second RT state. Then, when the AT mode is shifted from the second RT state to the third RT state and the AT mode ends in the third RT state, a shift to the fixed RT state can occur. . In the above-described first embodiment, the display mode that causes the transition to the third RT state is referred to as the VB mode. This will be described as a mode. In other words, by winning the transition mode transition lottery, the transition to the 3rd RT state occurs. More specifically, by winning the transition mode transition lottery, when the second promotion replay 1, 2 is won Pressing order notification corresponding to the fourth re-game winning prize and the fifth re-game winning prize is performed.

FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the second special combination process in this modified example. As already explained, the second special combination process is mainly performed based on the lottery result of each game in the AT mode in the second RT state or the fourth RT state (FIG. 32, step S707).

In this modification, in step S4101, a process of grasping the number of remaining AT mode games is executed. As already explained, the number of AT mode remaining games can be grasped from the AT mode continuation counter. In step S4102, a process of acquiring the shift mode lottery table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is executed. The transition mode lottery table is set so that the probability of shifting to the transition mode differs depending on the number of remaining AT mode games. It is set to increase the probability of causing migration. For example, when the number of remaining games is 50 games or more, there is a 0% probability that the transition to the transition mode occurs (the lottery for transition to the transition mode is not won), and the number of remaining games is 49 to 30 games. If the number of remaining games is 29 to 10 games, there is a 10% probability of switching to the transition mode, and the number of remaining games is less than 10. , the transition mode lottery table is set so that the transition to the transition mode occurs with a probability of 30%.

In step S4103, transition mode lottery processing is executed to determine whether or not to cause transition to the transition mode based on the number of remaining AT mode games ascertained in step S4101 and the transition mode lottery table acquired in step S4102. . In step S4104, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S4103 is a winning result that causes transition to the transition mode. If it is a winning result, the process of setting the transition mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S4105, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The transition mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is possible to cause transition to the transition mode. Then, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won in a situation where the transition mode flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1311 in the pushing process (FIG. 48), and the fourth replay is performed in step S1312. Processing for notifying the pressing order corresponding to the winning or the fifth replay winning is performed.

If it is determined in step S4104 that there is no winning result, the process proceeds to step S4106. The processing of steps S4106 to S4121 is the same as the processing of steps S914 to S929, and performs processing for adding AT mode, processing for specialized zones, and processing for notification of pseudo-addition.

Winning result correspondence processing in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this modification, generally, the process when the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is established and the game state shifts to the third RT state is different from that of the first embodiment. .

That is, the number-of-games management process in steps S4201 to S4210, the post-addition notification process, and the process based on the third replay win are the same as the processes in steps S1501 to S1510. If it is determined in step S4203 that the winning result of the current game is not the third replay winning, the process advances to step S4211 to determine whether the winning result of the current game is the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning. determine whether In the case of the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize, the flow advances to step S4212 to determine whether or not the transition mode flag is set. If the transition mode flag is not set, the transition mode lottery (step S4103) is not won, and the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established by chance, and the transition to the third RT state occurs. Yes, in this case, the main winning result handling process is terminated. If the transition mode flag is set, the process advances to step S4213.

In step S4213, it is determined whether or not the shift notification flag is set. As described above, the transition notification flag is a flag for generating push order notification corresponding to the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won. If the shift notification flag is set, the winning result handling process is terminated. If not set, the process advances to step S4214.

In step S4214, a process of setting a shift notification flag is executed. Then, in step S4215, after executing the process of setting the transition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result handling process ends. That is, the processes of steps S4214 and S4215 are the same as the processes of steps S3203 and S3204 that are executed when the number of remaining games in the AT mode of the fixed RT process (FIG. 76) reaches 10 in the first embodiment. It corresponds. In this modified example, the fixed RT process is not performed.

That is, in the present modification, the notification flag for transition is set by shifting to the 3RT state after winning the transition lottery to the transition mode, and the 11th replay win or the 12th replay when the transition replay 1 or 2 is won. If the pressing order notification corresponding to the game winning is generated, and the lottery for transition to the transition mode is not won, or the transition to the 3rd RT state does not occur, even if the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10. The transition notification flag is not set, and the high RT state (second RT state or third RT state) ends without causing a transition to the fixed RT state.

The processing of steps S4216 to S4220 when a negative determination is made in step S4211 is the same as the processing of steps S1517 to S1521.

The state of transition to the RT state in this modified example will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

In the transition mode lottery process (step S4103), the transition mode lottery is won after the timing t25 when the number of remaining AT mode games becomes less than 50 games. For example, if the transition mode lottery is won at the timing of t26 when the number of remaining AT mode games is less than 50, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won, the push order for the 4th replay win and the 5th replay win Notifications will occur.

When the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won at the timing of t27 and the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state by the stop operation according to the pressing order notification, the shift replays 1 and 2 can be won. Further, at the timing of t27, by establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning, the notification flag for transition is set. As a result, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won in the 3rd RT state, the pressing order notification corresponding to the 11th replay winning prize and the 12th replay winning prize is generated (timing t28), and the corresponding pushing order is generated. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in accordance with the notification, a transition is made to a fixed RT state in which a state with a high replay probability is maintained until a predetermined number of games after the timing t29 at which the AT mode ends is completed. It is possible to Although it is possible to win the second promotion replays 1 and 2 even at the timing before winning the transition mode lottery at the timing of t26, the pressing order notification at the time of winning is an operation corresponding to the first regame winning. Even if the stop operation is performed in an operation order different from the pressing order notification and succeeds in establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning, the transition notification flag is not set. Therefore, even if the transition to the third RT state happens to succeed in the second RT state, it is difficult to subsequently transition to the fixed RT state.

As described above, in the AT mode, instead of directly transitioning from the second RT state to the fixed RT state, the fixed RT state is changed by interposing a state such as the transition mode (third RT state) that can win the transition lottery to the fixed RT state. By adopting a configuration for transitioning to the state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that causes the transition to the fixed RT state by chance.

In addition, when comparing the second RT state and the third RT state in terms of ease of transition to the fixed RT state, it is easier to transition to the fixed RT state in the third RT state than in the second RT state. can also be referred to as a low-probability state, and the third RT state as a high-probability state. In this case, as described above, it is possible not only to expect an improvement in game playability due to the transition rate to the fixed RT state during the AT mode, but also if the AT mode ends without transitioning to the fixed RT state in the third RT state. Even so, the transition to the fixed RT state occurs during the recovery interval from the end of the AT mode to the end of the high RT state than when the AT mode ends in the low-probability state of the second RT state. It also realizes a playability that makes it easier to play. That is, depending on whether or not the transition to the third RT state occurs in the final stage of the AT mode, transition to the fixed RT state is likely to occur or less likely to occur in the return interval. In this way, by setting the above-mentioned high probability state or low probability state during AT mode, it is expected that the game performance including the return section will be greatly improved, and it is possible to aim for medal acquisition by notifying the pressing order of AT mode. It is possible to realize a novel game property that breaks away from the game property.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, the transition to the fourth RT state as the fixed RT state occurs only during the normal game state. As already explained, in the 1st RT state, when the transition rolls stop according to the operation sequence when the winning order of the bell is won, the state shifts to the 1st RT state. It only transitions after the end of the fourth RT state. Then, when comparing the normal game state and the 1st RT state as states in which the player can stay a lot during normal times, the rate of staying in the 1st RT state is overwhelmingly higher than the rate of staying in the normal game state.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal game state in this modified example. In this modification, the point value PV for the normal replay with the index value IV=1 is allocated to transition replays 1 and 2 with IV=13 and 14. FIG. That is, in the normal game state, it is possible to win transition replays 1 and 2 without winning the normal replay.

As shown in FIG. 102, when the 11th re-game winning or 12th re-game winning based on winning transition replays 1 and 2 is established in the normal game state, the state is shifted to the 4th RT state, and a predetermined number of games is played. A game can be played in a high RT state. As mentioned above, the rate of staying in the 1RT state is overwhelmingly high between the normal game state and the 1RT state, and the normal game state that allows the transition to the 4RT state is mainly the first thing in the morning (immediately after the power is turned on). Or, it is limited to after the BB state ends. By doing so, it is possible to realize the playability such as whether or not it is possible to cause the transition to the fourth RT state under limited circumstances such as the first thing in the morning or after the BB state ends.

Here, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won, by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the operation order corresponding to the 11th replay winning and the 12th replay winning, the 11th replay winning and the 12th replay winning are performed. Award is established. Therefore, if the first state in the morning or the state after the end of the BB state is the normal mode, the press order notification does not occur. can depend. That is, the probability that the transition to the fourth RT state occurs under the normal game state becomes lower.

On the other hand, when the BB state ends in the AT mode or the like in which the push order notification can occur, the game can be played in the normal game state in the situation where the push order notification can occur. Then, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won, the 11th replay winning prize and the 12th replay winning prize can be established, and the transition to the 4th RT state can be easily made. In addition, in the normal game state during the AT mode, since the push order notification is generated even when the push order bell is won, the transition result of the push order bell, which is the missing number, is except for the case of shifting to the first RT state. , basically does not stop. As a result, the possibility of winning transition replays 1 and 2 before transitioning to the first RT state in which transition replays 1 and 2 are not won increases.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing fixed RT processing in this modified example.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state by determining whether various RT setting flags and the like are set in step S4302. In the normal game state, it is determined in step S4303 whether or not the number of remaining AT mode games is 10 or less. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S4301 to S4303, the process for fixed RT ends immediately.

Here, also in this modification, if the initial number of games at the start of the AT mode is greater than 10 and the number of remaining games is 10 or less in step S4303, the state is temporarily shifted to the second RT state and the AT mode is played. is started, and then the game state shifts to the normal game state. More specifically, a bonus win is won during the AT mode, and the number of remaining AT mode games after the BB state ends is 10 or less. This is the case. In this case, in step S4304, the transition notification flag is set, and in step S4305, the transition command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the fixed RT process ends. In this case, if transition replays 1 and 2 are won, push order notification for establishing the 11th replay winning prize and the 12th replay winning prize is generated.

Thus, in this modification, when the bonus is won during the AT mode, after the BB state ends, during the return interval for returning to the high RT state (second RT state), to the fixed RT state migration is allowed. By doing so, it becomes more difficult to cause a transition to the fixed RT state, and the rarity of the fixed RT state is increased.

In addition, since the transition to the normal game state is caused by winning the bonus, and the transition to the fixed RT state is allowed only during the normal game state, the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the push order replay. Compared to a configuration that allows transition to a state that can cause a transition to a fixed RT state (in the first embodiment, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the transition state) based on the operation order etc., the operation order It is possible to make it difficult to cause an event in which the transition state occurs unintentionally due to, for example, coincidence. Therefore, it is possible to suppress unintentional transition to the fixed RT state, strengthen the impression that the transition to the transition state has been won by lottery, and improve the game playability.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, an application example will be described in which the AT mode is basically configured to be played in the third RT state, and the second RT state is the preparatory state before shifting to the AT mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 104, the AT mode count start is performed based on the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning, and the AT notification flag is set in the normal game state or the first RT state. By the 3rd re-game winning, it shifts to the 2nd RT state as the above-mentioned preparation state, and when the 4th re-game winning or 5th re-game winning is established in the 2nd RT state, it shifts to the 3rd RT state and AT mode. is started.

In the fixed RT process in this modified example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is in the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S4403 whether or not the number of remaining AT mode games is 10 or less. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S4401 to S4403, the process for fixed RT ends immediately. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, a transition notification flag is set in step S4404, and processing for setting a transition command is executed in step S4405, after which the fixed RT processing ends.

In this case, since the AT mode is basically implemented in the 3rd RT state, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4402, (1) a bonus win is made during the AT mode, and after the BB state (2) In the 3rd RT state, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order than the notification of the pushing order when winning the pushing order in the 3rd RT state, after that , or during the period until returning to the third RT state. If such a situation occurs at the end of the AT mode, if the configuration allows the transition to the fixed RT state, not only the effect of the bonus winning but also the unintentional transition to the low RT state can be achieved. It is also possible to provide relief in the event of a failure, and furthermore, it becomes possible to realize game characteristics such as daring to shift to a low RT state and win the shift to a fixed RT state, thereby greatly diversifying the ways of enjoying games. be able to.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a configuration for shifting to the fixed RT state in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section will be described. As already explained, the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section such as AT mode including CZ mode is predetermined, and the present slot machine 10 is configured to forcibly terminate the advantageous section with the upper limit of 1500 games (see FIG. 54). ). Here, the relationship between the number of games to be played based on the winning of a special combination in the AT mode or the like and the upper limit number of games will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing AT mode game number addition processing, and the game number addition processing is executed, for example, in step S918 of FIG. In addition, this embodiment has a configuration in which it is possible to shift to the fixed RT state in the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state in the first embodiment (in the lottery table for the 2nd RT state or the lottery table for the 3rd RT state configuration that can win the transition replay) will be described as a base.

In step S4501, a process of grasping the number of added games in the added game that will occur this time is performed. In step S4502, it is determined whether or not an excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The excess flag is set in the remaining game count management process (step S1903, FIG. 55) in the second section display process (FIG. 54), by displaying the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, the number of games in the currently completed advantageous section, and the number of games scheduled to be played. This is a flag that is set when the number of vacant games FG that can be added becomes 0 (step S2011). If the excess flag is not set, the process advances to step S4503.

In step S4503, it is determined whether or not the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less due to the current addition and an excess flag is set based on the number of games to be added this time and the number of empty games FG that can be added at present. If the excess flag is not set even after the addition this time, the process advances to step S4504 to add the number of games added this time to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and then the addition process ends.

If it is determined in step S4502 that the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S4505. In step S4505, the value corresponding to the number of games added this time is added to the excess counters provided in the various counter areas 106e, and then the addition processing ends. In other words, in a situation where the excess flag is set, there is practically no addition, and the excess amount is simply added to the excess counter.

If it is determined in step S4503 that the excess flag is set by the addition this time, the flow advances to step S4506. In step S4506, the current number of idle games FG is subtracted from the current number of additional games to grasp the excess amount. Then, in step S4507, a process of adding the number of games excluding the excess to the number of remaining AT mode games is executed. After that, in step S4508, the process of adding the excess amount to the excess counter is executed, and then the addition process ends.

As described above, in the process of adding the number of games in the AT mode, in relation to the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, the number of games exceeding the upper limit of the number of games is exceeded while preventing the addition of the number of games exceeding the upper limit of the number of games. It is configured to be stored by a counter.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing fixed RT processing in this embodiment.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the AT notification flag has been set, in this embodiment, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the excess flag has been set. If the excess flag is set, it is determined in step S4603 whether or not 50 games remain until the upper limit number of games (1500) in the advantageous section. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S4601 to S4603, the process for fixed RT is terminated, and by making an affirmative determination in any of steps S4601 to S4603, transition to the fixed RT state after step S4604 is permitted. Proceed to processing for

That is, in the present embodiment, the number of vacant games FG that can be added in the advantageous interval is 0, and the continuation of the AT mode has already been confirmed up to the upper limit of the advantageous interval. When the number of games reaches 50 as the predetermined number, processing is performed to allow transition to the fixed RT state.

More specifically, in step S4604, based on the above-described excess counter, a process of grasping the excess amount of addition that has occurred so far is executed. Then, in step S4605, fixed RT game number lottery processing is executed. In the fixed RT game number lottery process, the fixed RT game number table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and based on the value of the excess counter ascertained in step S4604, the number of fixed RT state games allowed this time is determined. lottery.

As shown in FIG. 108, the fixed RT game number table in the present embodiment has a plurality of types of fixed RT game numbers assigned according to the value of the excess counter. A number of fixed RT states are set to be easily selected. More specifically, for example, if the value of the excess counter is 50 or less, 50 games are selected, and if the value of the excess counter is 51 to 75, 50 games and 100 games are each 70%. A percentage of 30% is selected. If the value of the excess counter is between 76 and 100, then 50 games are selected at 30%, 100 games are selected at 60%, and 200 games are selected at 10 games. If the excess counter value is 101 to 199, 100 games are selected at 60%, 200 games are selected at 40 games, and if the excess counter value is 200 or more, 200 games are always selected. In other words, the fixed RT game number table is set so that the number of games in the fixed RT state that is the same as the value of the excess counter as much as possible is selected.

In step S4606, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S4605 is 50 games. If it is the 50th game, in step S4607, a process of setting the first shift notification flag in the various flags storage area 106d is executed. Then, in step S4608, the processing for setting the command for transition as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the processing for fixed RT ends.

If it is determined in step S4606 that the number of games has not been 50, it is determined in step S4609 whether or not the number of games has been 100. If the number of games is 100, the process advances to step S4610 to execute a process of setting a second shift notification flag in the various flags storage area 106d. Then, after setting a transition command in step S4608, the process for fixed RT ends.

A negative determination at step S4609 means that the lottery result at step S4606 was 200 games. to run. Then, after setting a transition command in step S4608, the process for fixed RT ends.

The first notification flag for transition, the second notification flag for transition, and the third notification flag for transition are flags for allowing transition to different fixed RT states. That is, as shown in FIG. 109(a), in this embodiment, in addition to the 11th and 12th regames, a 13th regame is provided as a regame for transitioning to the fixed RT state. ing. The thirteenth replay is the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" on the right reel 32R. The winning mode is set so that the winning is established when the symbol or the "watermelon" symbol stops on the activated line.

In this embodiment, when the 11th re-game win is established, the state shifts to the 4th RT state as a fixed RT state of 50 games, and when the 12th re-game win is established, the state shifts to the 5th RT state as a fixed RT state of 100 games. , when the 13th re-game winning is established, the state shifts to the sixth RT state as the fixed RT state of the 200th game.

The lottery table for the fourth RT state to the lottery table for the sixth RT state in the present embodiment are all configured to use the lottery table for the fourth RT state in the first embodiment. That is, in the fourth RT state to the sixth RT state, the advantage per game is common. Unless otherwise specified, the same lottery table is common to each state of the fixed RT state in other embodiments and modifications.

FIG. 109(b) shows part of the lottery table for the second RT state and the lottery table for the third RT state in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the first replay, the second replay, and the 11th replay are set as the winning combination when winning with the index value IV=13, and winning with the index value IV=14. 1st replay, 2nd replay, and 12th replay are set as the winning combination in the case of , and the 1st replay is the winning combination in the case of winning with the index value IV=57. , 2nd replay and 13th replay are set.

FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the fixed number of RT games setting process in this embodiment. In addition, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21) in this embodiment, even if the 13th re-game winning is established in addition to the 11th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning, affirmative determination is made in step S516. Then, in step S517, the already set RT setting flag is cleared, and in step S518, after setting the RT setting flag corresponding to the replay in which a prize is established, fixed RT game number setting processing is performed in step S519. proceed to In more detail about step S518, when the 11th re-game win is established, the 4th RT setting flag is set, and when the 12th re-game win is established, the 5th RT setting flag is set, and the 12th re-game win is established. 13 If the replay win has been established, the sixth RT setting flag is set.

In the fixed RT game number setting process in this embodiment, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the eleventh regame winning has been established. When the eleventh replay win is established, 50 is input to the fixed RT game number counter in step S4702, and the number of games in the fixed RT state this time is set to 50 games. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4703 whether or not the 12th regame winning has been established. When the twelfth replay winning prize is established, 100 is input to the fixed RT game number counter in step S4703, and the number of games in the fixed RT state this time is set to 100 games. A negative determination at step S4703 means that the 13th replay winning prize has been established. Let the number be 200 games. After executing any one of steps S4702, S4704 and S4705, the fixed number of RT games setting process ends.

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing a part of the pushing runner-up process in this modified example.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S1314 that the BAR replay win has not been made, the process proceeds to step S4801. In step S4801, it is determined whether or not transition replay 1 is won. If the transition replay 1 is won, in step S4802, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. End the process. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the first shift notification flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the transition to the fourth RT state, in which 50 games are defined games, is allowed. If the first shift notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4804. In step S4804, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify the pressing order of the stop order corresponding to the eleventh regame winning. Then, in step S4805, after setting a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the eleventh regame winning, the main push order process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4803 that the notification flag for the first transition is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806, and after executing the processing for performing notification of the pressing order for the first regame winning prize, in step S4807 the first After setting a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to one replay win, the main push order process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4801 that transition replay 1 is not won, the process proceeds to step S4808. In step S4808, it is determined whether or not transition replay 2 is won. If the transition replay 2 is won, in step S4809, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. End the process. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S4810 whether or not the second shift notification flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the transition to the fifth RT state, in which 100 games are defined games, is allowed. If the second shift notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4811. In step S4811, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify the pressing order of the stop order corresponding to the 12th regame winning. Then, in step S4812, after setting a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the 12th regame winning, the main push order process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4810 that the notification flag for the second transition is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806, and after executing the processing for performing notification of the pressing order for the first regame winning, in step S4807, the After setting a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to one replay win, the main push order process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4808 that transition replay 2 is not won, the process proceeds to step S4813. In step S4813, it is determined whether or not transition replay 3 is won. If the transition replay 3 is won, in step S4814, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. End the process. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S4815 whether or not the third shift notification flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the transition to the sixth RT state, in which 200 games are defined games, is permitted. When the information flag for the 3rd shift is set, it progresses to Step S4816. In step S4816, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify the pressing order of the stop order corresponding to the 13th regame winning. Then, in step S4817, after setting a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the thirteenth replay winning prize, the main push order process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4815 that the notification flag for the third transition is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806, and after executing the processing for performing notification of the pressing order for the first regame winning, in step S4807 the After setting a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to one replay win, the main push order process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S4813 that the transition replay 3 is not won, the process advances to step S1324 to execute processing for pressing order bell.

In the winning result handling process (FIG. 49) of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not any of the 11th re-game winning, the 12th re-game winning and the 13th re-game winning has been established in step S1522. If such a prize has been established, processing for varying the effect at the start of the fixed RT state is performed in step S1523 depending on the presence or absence of each transition notification flag. That is, if any transition notification flag is set, the first fixed RT start command is set, and if none of the transition notification flags is set, the second fixed RT start command is set. .

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of games exceeding the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is added, the transition to the fixed RT state is allowed in consideration of the number of games corresponding to the number of games. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of losing a lot of extra money due to the upper limit of the number of games by shifting to a high RT state. becomes.

After providing a plurality of fixed RT states with different stipulated number of games that can be executed, a fixed RT state with the excess number of games itself (equal to the excess) is selected by selecting a fixed RT state close to the excess. The number of types of fixed RT states to be provided is overwhelmingly reduced compared to the configuration that causes the transition to . Therefore, by suppressing the erosion of the limited memory capacity of the game machine by the information for the fixed RT state and making it possible to store other information, it is possible to diversify the game and enrich the game. be done.

In order to make the transition to the fixed RT state before the upper limit of the advantageous interval is reached, the notification flag for transition is set earlier than in the first embodiment. By doing so, it is possible to more preferably avoid an event in which the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached without transition to the fixed RT state.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described second embodiment, one type of fixed RT state that can be shifted to one transition replay is set. do. FIG. 112(a) shows part of the lottery table for the second RT state and the lottery table for the third RT state in this modified example. Also, FIG. 112(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning result and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 when transition replays 1 and 2 are won in this modification.

In this modified example, a first replay, a second replay, an eleventh replay, and a twelfth replay are set as the winning combination when winning with the index value IV=13. In addition, as a winning combination when winning with index value IV=14, a first replay, a second replay, a 12th replay, and a 13th replay are set. When the transition replay 1 with the index value IV=13 is won, the 11th replay winning is established by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode (middle→right→left). , the 12th re-game win is established when the player is operated in a second operation mode (right→middle→left) different from the first operation mode. In addition, when transition replay 2 with index value IV = 14 is won, a third operation mode (middle → left → Right), the 12th replay win is established, and the 13th replay win is established by operating in the 4th operation mode (right → left → middle), which is different from the 1st to 3rd operation modes. do.

When the 11th re-game win is established, the state shifts to the 4th RT state of the 50th game, when the 12th re-game win is established, the state shifts to the 5th RT state of the 100th game, and when the 13th re-game win is established, the state shifts to the 6th RT state of the 200th game. , as described above.

Incidentally, the third operation mode and the fourth operation mode of transition replay 1 are associated with the second re-game winning, and the first and second operation modes of transition replay 2 are associated with the second re-game winning. are mapped. When transition replay 1 and transition replay 2 are won, it is impossible to identify which transition replay is won before the stop. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to operate according to the press order notification in that the first re-game winning prize and any of the 11th re-game winning prizes to the 13th re-game winning prizes can be won and the high RT state is maintained. becomes.

In the pushing order processing, when the transition replay 1 is won and the AT notification flag and the first transition notification flag are set, the pressing of the first operation mode enabling the eleventh replay winning prize. Processing for forward notification is performed. On the other hand, when the transition replay 1 is won, if the AT notification flag and the second transition notification flag are set, the second operation mode enabling the 12th regame winning is used for the pressing order notification. processing takes place. Then, when the transition replay 1 is won, although the AT notification flag is set, if neither the first transition notification flag nor the second transition notification flag is set, the first replay Processing for informing of the pressing order of the operation mode corresponding to the game winning is performed. The same is true when the transition replay 2 is won, and when the AT notification flag and the second transition notification flag are set, the pressing order of the third operation mode that enables the 12th regame winning. Processing for notification is performed. On the other hand, when the transition replay 2 is won, if the AT notification flag and the third transition notification flag are set, the pressing order notification of the fourth operation mode that enables the 13th replay winning prize. processing takes place. Then, when the transition replay 2 is won, although the AT notification flag is set, if neither the second transition notification flag nor the third transition notification flag is set, the first replay Processing for informing of the pressing order of the operation mode corresponding to the game winning is performed.

In this way, by setting multiple types of transitions to the fixed RT state in one transition replay, it is possible to adjust which RT state to transition to by pressing order notification or operation order. In this way, the lottery table can be simplified, and even though the player has won the transition replay, the transition replay is different from the RT state to be transitioned, and the transition of the RT state is caused. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of events such as not being able to That is, it is possible to more reliably shift to the desired RT state.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the excess over the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval is premised on the configuration in which the high RT state due to the fixed RT state is compensated, but in this modification, the excess is the infinite RT state. A configuration for compensation in a high RT state by is explained. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a part of the lottery table for the seventh RT state to the ninth RT state to which transition is possible in this modified example.

In this modification, when the 11th re-game win is established, the state shifts to the 7th RT state, when the 12th re-game win is established, the state shifts to the 8th RT state, and when the 13th re-game win is established, the state shifts to the 9th RT state. and As described above, the 7th RT state to the 9th RT state are infinite RT states, and are high RT states in which the replay probability is higher than the normal game state and the low RT state of the 1st RT state. In the 7th RT state to the 9th RT state, in addition to the normal replay with the index value IV = 1, it is configured to be able to win the falling replays 1 to 3 with the index value IV = 7 to 9, and other pushing order replays (IV = 2-6, 10-14) will not win.

In the 7th RT state, the probability of winning one of the drop replays 1-3 with index values IV=7-9 is about 1/33.1. In fall replays 1 to 3, the operation order corresponding to the second replay winning that causes the transition to the first RT state is set to 4 out of 6 types of operation orders (FIG. 23), so fall replay 1 The probability of establishing the second replay prize when winning 1 to 3 is 4/6 respectively. Then, in the 7th RT state, the probability of establishing a second replay winning prize per game (hereinafter also referred to as drop probability) is about 1/50. In other words, when transitioning to the seventh RT state, the number of games in which the high RT state is maintained can be long or short, but the average number of continuous games is about 50 games.

In the eighth RT state, the probability of winning one of the fall replays 1-3 with index values IV=7-9 is about 1/66.2. In addition, the probability of winning the second replay when winning replays 1 to 3 is 4/6, respectively. Then, in the eighth RT state, the fall probability per game is about 1/100. In other words, when transitioning to the eighth RT state, the number of games in which the high RT state is maintained can be long or short, but the average number of continuous games is about 100 games.

In the ninth RT state, the probability of winning one of the fall replays 1-3 with index values IV=7-9 is about 1/132.4. In addition, the probability of winning the second replay when winning replays 1 to 3 is 4/6, respectively. Then, in the 9th RT state, the fall probability per game is about 1/200. In other words, when transitioning to the ninth RT state, the number of games in which the high RT state is maintained can be long or short, but the average number of continuous games is about 200 games.

If the 7th RT state to the 9th RT state as described above can be shifted according to the excess of the advantageous section, it will be possible to compensate for the excess by the infinite RT state instead of the fixed RT state. .

In this case, although the transition from the fixed RT state to the infinite RT state cannot occur, the transition from the infinite RT state to the infinite RT state and the transition from the infinite RT state to the fixed RT state do occur (Fig. 26). By using the seventh RT state to the ninth RT state as such infinite RT states, the expandability of the game configuration is overwhelmingly enhanced. On the other hand, in the infinite RT state, the number of continuous games depends on luck, and from the viewpoint of ensuring compensation for the excess, it is preferable to use the fixed RT state.

<Third Embodiment>
In the above-described first and second embodiments, the invention has been mainly described in which the high RT state can be extended after the end of the AT mode by shifting to the fixed RT state. , the high RT state is easily ended in the AT mode end game by shifting to the fixed RT state.

In this embodiment, the 11th to 15th regames are set as the combination to transition to the fixed RT state. The combination of symbols for the 11th replay win, the 12th replay win and the 13th replay win is as described above, and the symbol combination for the 14th replay win is shown in FIG. 114(a). , "red bell" or "white bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "first replay" or "second replay" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and "black BAR" or "watermelon" symbols on the right reel 32R. are mapped. In addition, the combination of symbols for winning the 15th replay is the “first replay” symbol or “second replay” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol, the “black BAR” symbol or the “cherry” symbol on the middle reel 32M. The symbol is associated with the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the right reel 32R.

When the 11th replay win is established, a transition to the 10th RT state as a fixed RT state for one game occurs. When the 12th regame win is established, a transition to the 11th RT state as the 2-game fixed RT state occurs. When the thirteenth replay win is established, a transition to the twelfth RT state as the three-game fixed RT state occurs. When the 14th re-game win is established, a transition to the 13th RT state as the 4-game fixed RT state occurs. When the 15th replay win is established, a transition to the 14th RT state as the 5-game fixed RT state occurs.

In the second RT state lottery table and the third RT state lottery table, as shown in FIG. In addition to the 1st replay and the 2nd replay, the 11th replay to the 14th replay are available for IV=13 as the winning combination when winning with the index value IV=13, 14, 57 to 59. 12th to 15th regames are associated with IV=14, and 11th and 13th to 15th regames are associated with IV=57. , the 11th replay, the 12th replay, the 14th replay and the 15th replay are associated with IV=58, and the 11th to 13th replays and the 15th replay are associated with IV=59. are mapped. The first re-game and the 11th to 15th re-games are associated with the winning combination in the case of winning with the index value IV=60.

FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning modes established when transition replays 1 to 6 are won.

In transition replays 1 to 5, 4 types of operation orders out of 6 types of operation orders are associated with transition hands to the fixed RT state (any of 11th replay to 15th replay), and others. is associated with the first replay and the second replay. Further, in the transition replay 6, 5 of the 6 operation orders are associated with the transition combination to the fixed RT state, and 1 operation order is associated with the first replay. It is

Even in the RT state process (FIG. 21) in this embodiment, in addition to the 11th and 12th re-game winnings, even if the 13th to 15th re-game winnings are established, the affirmative determination is made in step S516. do. Then, in step S517, the already set RT setting flag is cleared, and in step S518, after setting the RT setting flag corresponding to the replay in which a prize is established, fixed RT game number setting processing is performed in step S519. proceed to In more detail about step S518, when the 11th re-game win is established, the 10th RT setting flag is set, and when the 12th re-game win is established, the 11th RT setting flag is set, and the 11th RT setting flag is set. When the 13th re-game win is established, the 12th RT setting flag is set, when the 14th re-game win is established, the 13th RT setting flag is set, and when the 15th re-game win is established. If yes, set the 14th RT setting flag.

In the fixed RT game number setting process in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. At step S4902, 1 is input to the number of fixed RT games counter to set the current number of games in the fixed RT state to one game. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4903 whether or not the 12th regame winning has been established. When the twelfth replay winning prize is established, 2 is input to the fixed RT game number counter in step S4904, and the number of games in the fixed RT state this time is set to 2 games. If a negative determination is made in step S4903, it is determined in step S4905 whether or not the 13th regame winning has been established. When the thirteenth replay win is established, 3 is input to the fixed RT game number counter in step S4906, and the number of games in the fixed RT state this time is set to 3 games. If a negative determination is made in step S4905, it is determined in step S4907 whether or not the 14th regame winning has been established. When the 14th replay win is established, 4 is input to the fixed RT game number counter in step S4908, and the number of games in the fixed RT state this time is set to 4 games. A negative determination at step S4907 means that the fifteenth replay winning prize has been established. Let the number be 5 games. After executing any one of steps S4902, S4904, S4906, S4908, and S4909, the fixed RT game number setting process ends.

The pushing runner-up process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 117 .

If it is determined in step S1314 in the pushing process (FIG. 48) that the BAR replay is not won, the process proceeds to step S5001. In step S5001, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is any of transition replays 1-6. If none of transition replays 1 to 6 is won, the process proceeds to step S1324 for the pressing order bell. If any of transition replays 1 to 6 is won, the process advances to step S5002 to determine whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If it is not set, the pushing process is terminated.

If the AT notification flag is set, the process advances to step S5003 to execute processing for grasping the number of remaining AT mode games. Then, in step S5004, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games is 6 or more based on the processing result of step S5003. If the number of games is 6 or more, the process advances to step S5005 to control the instruction monitor 68 so that the push order notification corresponding to the first replay win is performed, and in step S5006 the process of setting the push order notification command is performed. After that, the pushing process ends. In this case, RT state transition does not occur, and basically the second RT state and the third RT state are maintained.

If it is determined in step S5004 that the number of remaining AT mode games is less than 6 games, the process proceeds to step S5007. In step S5007, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games is one. If there is one game remaining, the process advances to step S5008 to determine whether or not the lottery result of the current game is transition replay 2 out of transition replays 1-6. In the case of any of transition replays 1, 3 to 6 instead of transition replay 2 winning, the process proceeds to step S5009, and the 11th replay as a transition role to the 10th RT state in which the prescribed number of games is set to 1 game. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify the pushing order corresponding to the prize winning. Then, in step S5006, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the push order process is terminated. In this case, by performing an operation according to the notification of the pressing order, a transition to the tenth RT state, which ends in one game, occurs.

If the transition replay 2 is won in step S5008, the 11th replay as a transition role to the 10th RT state in which the prescribed number of games is set to 1 game is not associated. Processing for notifying the pressing order corresponding to the replay winning is performed.

If it is determined in step S5007 that the number of AT mode remaining games is not one, the process proceeds to step S5010. In step S5010, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games is 2 games. If there are two games remaining, the process advances to step S5011 to determine whether or not the lottery result of the current game is transition replay 3 among transition replays 1-6. If it is any of transition replays 1, 2, 4 to 6 instead of transition replay 3 winning, the process proceeds to step S5012, and the 12th as a transition role to the 11th RT state in which the prescribed number of games is set to 2 games. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the replay winning prize is performed. Then, in step S5006, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the push order process is terminated. In this case, a transition to the 11th RT state, which ends after two games, occurs by performing an operation according to the notification of the pressing order.

If the transition replay 3 is won in step S5013, the 12th replay as a transition role to the 11th RT state in which the prescribed number of games is set to 2 games is not associated. Processing for notifying the pressing order corresponding to the replay winning is performed.

If it is determined in step S5010 that the number of AT mode remaining games is not two, the process proceeds to step S5013. In step S5013, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games is 3 games. If there are three remaining games, the process advances to step S5014 to determine whether or not the lottery result of the current game is transition replay 4 among transition replays 1-6. If the transition replay 4 is not won, but is one of transition replays 1 to 3, 5 to 6, the process proceeds to step S5015, and the 13th as a transition role to the 12th RT state in which the prescribed number of games is set to 3 games. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the replay winning prize is performed. Then, in step S5006, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the push order process is terminated. In this case, a transition to the 12RT state, which ends after three games, is caused by performing an operation according to the notification of the pressing order.

In the case where transition replay 4 is won in step S5014, the 13th replay as a transition role to the 12th RT state in which the prescribed number of games is set to 3 games is not associated. Processing for notifying the pressing order corresponding to the replay winning is performed.

If it is determined in step S5013 that the number of AT mode remaining games is not three, the process proceeds to step S5016. In step S5016, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games is 4 games. If there are four remaining games, the process advances to step S5017 to determine whether or not the lottery result of the current game is transition replay 5 among transition replays 1-6. If the transition replay 5 is not won but any of the transition replays 1 to 4 and 6, the process proceeds to step S5018, and the 14th replay as a transition role to the 13th RT state in which the specified number of games is set to 4 games. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify the pushing order corresponding to the prize winning. Then, in step S5006, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the push order process is terminated. In this case, a transition to the 13th RT state, which ends after 4 games, occurs by performing an operation according to the notification of the pressing order.

If the transition replay 5 is won in step S5017, the 14th replay as a transition role to the 13th RT state in which the prescribed number of games is set to 4 games is not associated. Processing for notifying the pressing order corresponding to the replay winning is performed.

When it is determined in step S5016 that the number of remaining AT mode games is not four, this means that the number of remaining games is five. In this case, the process advances to step S5019 to determine whether or not the lottery result of the current game is transition replay 1 out of transition replays 1-6. If the transition replay 1 is not won, but is any of transition replays 2 to 6, the process proceeds to step S5020, and the 15th replay win as a transition role to the 14th RT state in which the prescribed number of games is set to 5 games. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the corresponding push order notification is performed. Then, in step S5006, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the push order process is terminated. In this case, a transition to the 14th RT state, which ends after 5 games, occurs by performing an operation according to the notification of the pressing order.

If the transition replay 1 is won in step S5019, the 15th replay as a transition role to the 14th RT state in which the prescribed number of games is set to 5 games is not associated, so the process proceeds to step S5005 and the first replay is not associated. Processing for notifying the pressing order corresponding to the replay winning is performed.

How the transition to the fixed RT state occurs just before the end of the AT mode will be described with reference to FIG.

At the timing of t30 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 5 games, if any of transition replays 1 to 6 is won, more specifically, any of transition replays 2 to 6, excluding transition replay 1, is won. In this case, the pressing order notification corresponding to the 15th re-game winning as a transition hand to the 14th RT state, which is the fixed RT state of 5 games, is generated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 118(a), at timing t32 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0, the number of remaining games in the fixed RT state as the 14th RT state (fixed RT game number counter) becomes 0. Thus, the high RT state ends at the end of the AT mode game, and the state shifts to the low RT state.

At the timing of t31 when the remaining number of AT mode games is 1 game, if any of transition replays 1 to 6 is won, more specifically, any of transition replays 1, 3 to 6, excluding transition replay 2 In the case of winning, the push order notification corresponding to the 11th re-game winning as a transition role to the 10th RT state, which is the fixed RT state of one game, is generated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 118(b), at timing t32 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0, the number of remaining games in the fixed RT state as the tenth RT state (fixed RT game number counter) becomes 0. Thus, the high RT state ends at the end of the AT mode game, and the state shifts to the low RT state.

As described above, the high RT state can be ended in the end game of the AT mode by using the configuration that causes the transition to the fixed RT state at the end of the AT mode. Despite this, there are players who end the game due to the end of the AT mode without knowing that the high RT state will continue, players who continue the game knowing that the high RT state will continue, and players who end the AT mode. Advantages and disadvantages between players can be eliminated with respect to players who take their seats after finishing the game, and the fairness of the game can be enhanced. Also, with the above configuration, the AT mode and the normal mode can be distinguished more clearly.

<Modification 1>
By doing as in the third embodiment, the high RT state ends at the end of the AT mode game, but as already explained, if the transition to the fixed RT state occurs at the end of the AT mode, it will be added later. It is determined that no notification will occur. Therefore, in this modified example, the transition to the fixed RT state is made to be advantageous for the player, and more specifically, the additional winning rate is changed. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an additional lottery table in this modified example.

As already explained, the additional lottery table is set so that the additional winning probability differs according to the type of specific combination, and furthermore, depending on the display mode such as AT mode, VB mode, special zone, etc. Also, the winning rate is different. In this modified example, the additional winning rate differs depending on whether the game state is the infinite RT state or the fixed RT state, and the additional winning rate in the fixed RT state is set to be higher than the additional winning rate in the infinite RT state. . Specifically, in the fixed RT state, the additional winning rate is set to 100% for any special combination.

In other words, at the end of the AT mode, due to the transition to the fixed RT state, it is possible to know in advance that the AT mode will end with the remaining few games, but in the AT mode with the remaining few games, the winning rate will be increased. It is set to be overwhelmingly higher than before. Therefore, the AT mode in the fixed RT state that shifts to the end of the AT mode constitutes a kind of so-called specialized zone.

An example of display effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 during the fixed RT state will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 120(a) shows an example of a display effect when the 13th RT state is shifted to the fixed RT state. For example, on the auxiliary display section 65, any three numbers from 1 to 9 as a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed side by side. In each game in the fixed RT state, the plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed, and the game is stopped in a stop mode according to the result of the additional lottery. Then, when the additional lottery is won, the combination of these identification information is made to have a predetermined form (for example, 333, etc.), and in the case of non-winning, a form different from the predetermined form (for example, , 334, etc.). In the auxiliary display section 65, characters corresponding to the fixed RT number of games (in the figure, an image resembling a bullet in the figure) are displayed for the number of games corresponding to the number of games played in the fixed RT state. Each time the game is played, the characters corresponding to the fixed RT game number are extinguished one by one (for example, one from the right).

In other words, games in the fixed RT state can be executed by the number of characters corresponding to the number of fixed RT games displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65, and are associated with the executable number of games in which an additional lottery is performed with a high probability. . Each game, the character corresponding to the fixed number of RT games is consumed, and the result of the additional lottery is informed by the stop result of the identification information.

FIG. 120(b) shows an example of a display effect when the 11th RT state is shifted to the fixed RT state. Compared to the 13th RT state shown in FIG. 120(a), the number of displayed characters corresponding to the fixed number of RT games is different. , 11th RT state are two corresponding to two games. In other words, the player can grasp the number of chances by the number of characters corresponding to the fixed number of RT games.

By doing so, it is possible to significantly improve the playability in the fixed RT state in a configuration in which the end of the AT mode is detected in advance by shifting to the fixed RT state. In other words, when transitioning to a fixed RT state with a relatively large number of games like the 13th RT state in FIG. 120(a), the transition is made to a fixed RT state with a small number of games like the 11th RT state in FIG. 120(b). From the viewpoint of detecting the end of the AT mode in advance, the end of the AT mode will be detected at an early stage, which is a disappointing result for the player who expects the subsequent notification. On the other hand, as described above, the greater the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state, the greater the chances of winning additional prizes. It can be said that it is the result. In this way, the earlier the end of the AT mode is detected, the more the number of games in the specialized zone (fixed RT state) increases, thereby realizing novel gameplay that keeps the AT mode entertained until the end. becomes possible.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, a game state transition mode and the like when an extra game occurs during the fixed RT state as in the above-described modified example 1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 121(a), for example, when it is determined in step S915 in the second special winning process that the AT mode additional lottery has been won, in step S5101, the current gaming state is the fixed RT state. Determine whether or not If it is not in the fixed RT state, the process advances to step S916 to perform processing for adding the AT mode. In the case of an additional winning in the fixed RT state, the process advances to step S5102 to grasp the current number of additional games and to add the grasped number of additional games to the latent counters provided in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S5103, the latent flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the second special combination process is terminated. That is, even if you win the AT mode addition in the fixed RT state, the processing to add to the remaining AT mode game number is not performed immediately, but it is temporarily added to the latency counter and the AT mode addition is carried over. be

Also, as shown in FIG. 121(b), in the number-of-games management process, if the number of continuations of the AT mode becomes 0 at step S1614, then at step S5111 it is determined whether the latent flag is set. determine whether or not If the latent flag is not set, the process advances to step S1615 to perform processing for ending the AT mode. On the other hand, if the latent flag is set, the process advances to step S5112 to clear the latent flag, and in step S5113 the process of setting the latent command to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. End the number management process. The display control device 81 that has received the concealment command displays the display of the auxiliary display section 65 as a display different from the normal display after the end of the AT mode regarding the display effect after the end of the AT mode. For example, if the normal display after the end of the AT mode is an evening background image, the night background image is displayed when the concealment command is received. If the normal display after the end of the AT mode is a background image with mountains in the background, the background image with a temple in the background is displayed when a hiding command is received.

As described above, when the latent flag is set, the AT notification flag is not cleared, and neither is the AT mode flag. Therefore, after the end of the fixed RT state, if the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won, the press order notification is generated, and the high RT state can be returned to the second RT state. Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, in the winning result handling process, when the third replay winning is established and the second RT state is restored, affirmative determination is made in steps S1503 to S1505. Then, after step S1505, the presence or absence of the hiding flag is determined, and if the hiding flag is set, the flag is cleared, and the value corresponding to the hiding counter is added to the number of continuations of the AT mode. , the winning result handling process is terminated. That is, the high RT state is resumed without consuming the number of additional games generated during the fixed RT state.

Using FIG. 121(c), the state of transition of the game state will be described again.

When an addition occurs at the timing of t33 during the AT mode due to the infinite RT state, the addition is added to the AT mode continuation count, and the number of games (addition notification) is also generated. On the other hand, in the final stage of the AT mode, after transitioning to the fixed RT state at the timing of t34, if additional games occur at the timing of t35, the number of additional games is not added to the number of continuations of the AT mode. As a result, the AT mode is thereafter ended at the timing of t36 along with the end of the fixed RT state. After the fixed RT state ends, it will be in the normal RT state (normal game state, low RT state), but since it is a state where the push order notification can occur, quickly 3rd replay when winning 1st promotion replay 1 to 4 Winning can be established, and the transition to the second RT state occurs at the timing of t37, for example. In this case, the additional amount generated at the timing of t35 is stored as a latent counter, and the value of the latent counter is added as the number of continuations of the AT mode at t37.

By doing this, when an addition occurs during the fixed RT state, the number of games during the low RT state from the end of the fixed RT state to the transition to the high RT state (infinite RT state), It is possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon that the number of AT mode games is reduced. By the way, during the low RT state from the end of the fixed RT state to the transition to the high RT state, even if the subtraction of the number of remaining AT mode games is stopped, the number of AT mode games will decrease. Avoidable. However, if it is configured to perform additional notification during the fixed RT state, then the additional notification will be performed despite the fact that the subtraction of the number of games will definitely stop. Become. Moreover, immediately after, if the additional notification is performed despite the fact that the high RT state will be interrupted, that is, if the additional notification is performed before the high RT state is interrupted, the additional notification will be interrupted. Since the game is played in a state (low RT state), there is a high possibility that the player will feel frustrated that the player is not in a high RT state. In that respect, as in the above configuration, once it is shifted to the low RT state, and when it returns to the high RT state, it is configured to additionally notify (input the value of the latency counter), so that a new feeling So, you can enjoy the high RT state and AT mode after returning, and in the interrupted state, the value of the latency counter is not notified, so rather than being frustrated with the low RT state, It is possible to play the game while looking forward to being notified of the value of the latent counter after returning. As a result of the above, in the high RT state and AT mode, it is possible to create a configuration in which the production effect can be expected instead of the inconvenience that the low RT state occurs due to the intervention of the fixed RT state, and the degree of attention to the game can be favorably increased. can be increased.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the above configuration is used in relation to the upper limit of the advantageous section. Although detailed description with reference to figures is omitted, in the pushing runner-up process in this modified example, a process of grasping the number of remaining games up to the upper limit (1500) of the advantageous section is performed in step S5003 of the flowchart of FIG. Then, if the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 6 games or more, notification of the pressing order for the first replay winning prize is performed (step S5005), and if it is 5 games or less, the number of games is fixed as the specified number. Notification of the pressing order for transition to the RT state is performed (steps S5007 to S5020). By doing so, in a configuration in which the AT mode or the like is forcibly terminated in the upper limit game of the advantageous section, it is possible to terminate the high RT state along with the forcible termination of the AT mode. Therefore, it is possible to strictly follow the significance of forced termination in the upper limit game.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of shifting to the fixed RT state just before the end of the AT mode is used in relation to the effect during the AT mode. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing part of the pressing order notification process in this embodiment.

That is, if it is determined in step S2409 that the lottery result of the current game is not BAR replay winning, it is determined in step S2412 whether transition replay winning is achieved. If the transition replay is not won, the process advances to the pressing order bell process in step S2415. If the transition replay is won, it is determined in step S2413 whether or not the transition replay notification flag is set. This shift replay notification flag is a flag that is set at the end of the AT mode, as described in the first embodiment, and is a flag that enables transition to the fixed RT state. If not set, the process advances to step S2405 to generate a push order notification effect for the first regame winning prize.

When it is determined in step S2413 that the transition replay notification flag is set, in this embodiment, in step S5201, a process of grasping the effect being executed is performed. Here, as an effect being executed (specific effect), music for AT mode (specific effect) will be described as an example. The music for the AT mode is an effect that continues over a predetermined period, and is repeatedly reproduced in the AT mode with the predetermined period as one set. If a plurality of types of AT mode music are set, the length of the predetermined period differs depending on the type of music. It can also be said that this is a process of grasping the length.

In the subsequent step S5202, a process of ascertaining the period until the end of one set in execution (period until break) is executed based on the type of music and the length of the predetermined period ascertained in step S5201. For example, if music with a predetermined period of 60 seconds is being reproduced, and the processing timing of step S5202 (the operation timing of the start lever 41) is the time when 15 seconds have passed since the start of one set of the music, then in step S5202, the remaining The period is 60sec-15sec and grasped as 45sec.

Then, in step S5203, a process of ascertaining the number of games that can be executed during the period ascertained in step S5202 is performed. In this case, for example, the calculation is performed assuming that one game takes about 5 seconds, and in the above example (if the remaining period is 45 seconds), in step S5203, 45 seconds/5 seconds is calculated assuming that 9 games are required.

In subsequent step S5204, it is determined whether or not the calculated number of games is greater than the number of remaining AT mode games. If the calculated number of games is equal to or less than the number of remaining games in the AT mode, the process advances to step S2405 to perform processing for generating the pushing order notification effect for the first re-game winning prize.

If the calculated number of games is greater than the number of remaining AT mode games, the process proceeds to step S5205. In step S5205, a push order notification effect is generated for shifting to a fixed RT state in which the number of games corresponding to the calculated number of games can be completed, and then the push order notification processing is terminated. In step S5205, for example, as in the above-described third embodiment, a transition replay is configured with multiple types of transitional hands to the fixed RT state as overlapping hands, and which transitional hand is to be won is determined accordingly. It is preferable that the number of games is determined from the number of games in the fixed RT state.

A supplementary description will be given of the setting of the AT mode end effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing a part of the all-stop effect setting process in this embodiment.

That is, if it is determined in step S2703 that the AT mode start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2705 whether or not the AT mode end command has been received. If the AT mode end command has been received and the AT mode ends in the current game, the process proceeds to step S5301. In step S5301, it is determined whether or not it is in the fixed RT state. If it is not in the fixed RT state, in step S5302, the AT mode end effect is set to be performed. In the AT mode ending effect, the number of medals obtained in the current AT mode, the number of continuous games, etc. are reported.

The fixed RT state in step S5301 is the case where the state is shifted to the fixed RT state in relation to the music (specific effect) in the AT mode as described above. In this case, in step S5303, a process of setting an ending postponement flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. The ending postponement flag is a flag for executing an AT mode ending effect in a game after the AT mode ending game. In this case, since the AT mode ending effect is not executed in the current game, it is preferable to store information on the number of medals obtained during the AT mode and the number of continuous games in the temporary storage area of the RAM 183 or the like.

In addition, when the ending postponement flag is set, the effect in the AT mode is also continued. More specifically, in the display mode setting process (step S2301) of each game in this embodiment, even if the AT mode flag is not set, if the ending postponement flag is set, the effect in the AT mode is displayed. Set the effect of the game so that it is performed.

After the process of step S5302 or step S5303 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2717 to perform the additional notification process at the time of all stops. Then, in step S2718, fixed RT state notification processing is executed.

After performing the process of step S2718, it progresses to step S5304. In step S5304, it is determined whether or not the current game is a fixed RT state ending game. If it is the end game, the process advances to step S5305 to determine whether or not the ending postponement flag is set. If it is set, the postponement flag is cleared in step S5306, and the contents temporarily stored as described above are set in step S5307 so that the AT mode end effect is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S5304 or step S5405, or if the process of step S5307 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2719 to set other stop effect, and then the all stop effect setting process ends.

That is, when the transition to the fixed RT state is made in accordance with the break of a specific effect in the AT mode, the AT mode end effect is postponed until the fixed RT state ends, and the AT mode ends when the fixed RT state ends. A performance occurs.

How the transition to the fixed RT state occurs in relation to the specific effect in the AT mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

As a specific effect in the AT mode, for example, in FIG. 124(a), it is assumed that music is being played for one set of predetermined periods from timing t40 to timing t42. If the transition replay is won at the timing of t41, the period up to the timing of t42, which is the break of the currently regenerated music, is grasped. Then, the number of games that can be executed in the period from t41 to t42 is calculated, and the calculated number of games is compared with the remaining number of AT mode games. In this case, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is larger, and in the shift replay winning at the timing of t41, the pushing order notification effect for the first replay winning prize is executed.

When the transition replay is won at the timing of t44, as in the case of t41, the period until t46, which is the break of the music being played, is grasped, and the number of games that can be executed in that period is calculated and the AT mode is performed. are compared with the number of remaining games. At the timing of t44, the number of games that can be executed is larger than that of the timing of t46, and in this case, a pressing order notification effect for shifting to the fixed RT state corresponding to the number of games that can be executed is generated. Then, although the AT mode ends at the timing of t45, the music is reproduced until the break timing of t46. When the fixed RT state ends at the timing of t46 and shifts to the normal RT state, an AT mode end effect is generated.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 124(b), if the specific effect to be grasped when winning the transition replay at the timing of t44 starts at the timing of t43 and the break is at the timing of t47, , the period from t44 to t47 is grasped, the number of games that can be executed during that period is calculated, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is compared. Also in this case, the number of games that can be executed is greater, and the pressing order notification effect for transition to the fixed RT state corresponding to the number of games that can be executed is generated. Then, although the AT mode ends at the timing of t45, the music is reproduced until the break timing of t47. When the fixed RT state ends at the timing of t47 and shifts to the normal RT state, an AT mode ending effect is generated.

In other words, even if the transition replay is won at the timing of t44, which is the same number of remaining games, the type of fixed RT state (number of games) to transition to is different depending on the situation of the specific effect being executed, and as a result , the execution timing of the AT mode end effect is also different.

By doing so, the high RT state continues until the timing of the break of the predetermined period in the music in the AT mode. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the music ends at the timing when the music becomes lively (such as the chorus), and the player can be fully entertained.

In this case, even if the transition to the fixed RT state is caused, since the AT mode itself ends first, no push order notification is generated for the extended portion, so it does not lead to an excessive increase in the advantage, and it can be used. There is not much difference in the degree of advantage between a player who adjusts the progress of the game by doing so and a player who does not. On the other hand, since the high RT state continues, it is possible to motivate the player to enjoy the performance to the end, as compared with a configuration in which only the performance is postponed.

When the fixed RT state is used to extend the high RT state to the break in the music in the AT mode, the AT mode end effect is also postponed. For players who want to play the game, it is meaningful to continue the game until the end of the music in the AT mode, and furthermore, the effect of making the AT mode itself seem like an extension can be expected.

In the above configuration, in order to explain the relationship with the music in the AT mode, it is configured to allow the transition to the fixed RT state by the processing on the display control device 81 side. Alternatively, the main controller 101 side may be configured to allow the transition to the fixed RT state by processing. In this case, it is preferable that the main controller 101 side be configured to be able to grasp the execution status of the specific effect.

<Modification>
In this modified example, a case will be described in which the above-described embodiment is applied to a gaming machine in which the ending effect is performed over a specific number of games at the end of the AT mode. The ending effect may be set to notify the end of the AT mode and, for example, when the AT mode continues for a long time, congratulate the AT mode for a long time. Here, an example will be described in which, when the upper limit of the advantageous interval is reached, the ending effect is performed several games before the upper limit game of the advantageous interval.

As shown in FIG. 125, at the timing of t50, the ending effect performed at the end of the AT mode is started. It is assumed that the ending effect in this case is performed over 10 games as a specific number of games. That is, the ending effect in this case is started 10 games before the upper limit of the advantageous interval of 1500 games, and the timing of t50 indicates the case where the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches 1490 games.

The display effect in the ending effect is clearly set to a break such as a frame for each game in accordance with the progress of the game. is set to update from one frame to the next. In other words, regardless of the progress speed of the game, the effect is set to end after 10 games from the start.

When the transition replay is won at the timing t51 after the ending effect is started, 10 games, which is the predetermined period of the specific effect, are grasped with the ending effect being executed as the specific effect. Then, the number of remaining games out of the 10 games is grasped, and the transition to the fixed RT state corresponding to the remaining number of games occurs. That is, at the timing of t51, the number of remaining games of the ending effect is 5 games, and the transition to the fixed RT state with 5 games as the prescribed number occurs.

At the timing of t52, the upper limit of 1500 games in the advantageous section is reached, and the AT mode ends. In this case, the ending effect also ends in the game at the timing of t52. Then, as described above, the number of remaining games in the transitioned fixed RT state also becomes 0 at timing t52, and the transition from the high RT state to the low RT state also occurs at timing t52. That is, in the forced end game in the advantageous section, the end of the AT mode, the end of the ending effect, and the end of the high RT state coincide.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) The transition notification flag is set when the number of AT mode remaining games reaches 10, but it may be set when the number of remaining games is greater or less. It may be configured to be set by the number of games. When the transition notification flag is set, the transition to the fixed RT state is permitted, and the transition is permitted when the number of remaining games is less than the prescribed number of games for the fixed RT state. Preferably. In addition, in the first embodiment, by setting the notification flag for transition, both the fixed RT state of 50 games and the fixed RT state of 200 games are allowed to transition. When a predetermined transition notification flag is set in the number, transition to one fixed RT state (200 games) is allowed, but transition to the other fixed RT state (50 games) is not allowed. As described above, the type of fixed RT state may be limited depending on the game to which transition is permitted (the state to which transition is permitted differs depending on the set notification flag). Furthermore, in the configuration for extending the RT state by allowing the transition to the infinite RT state instead of the fixed RT state as in Modification 2 of the second embodiment, the number of remaining games in the AT mode causes the transition. A transition notification flag may be set when it is equal to or less than the denominator of the winning probability of the falling replay in the infinite RT state. That is, for example, if the winning probability of the fall replay in the infinite RT state to be shifted is 1/50, the infinite RT state will continue for an average of 50 games even if the pushing order notification does not occur. , when the number of remaining AT mode games becomes 10, which is 50 or less, which is the denominator of the winning probability (1/50), the transition to the infinite RT state is allowed, It is possible to extend the RT state rather than ending the AT mode with the infinite RT state before transition.

(2) In the first embodiment, when transition replay 1 is won, the 11th replay win occurs and the state shifts to the fixed RT state of 50 games, and when transition replay 2 is won, the 12th replay win occurs and 200 games are played. By changing the winning probability between transition replay 1 and transition replay 2, the balance with the advantage (the number of games in the fixed RT state to be transitioned) is secured. For example, the 11th re-game and the 12th re-game are configured to be won in duplicate in the same transition replay, and the 11th re-game win and the 12th re-game win are established depending on the occurrence rate and selection rate of push order notification etc. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of ease is varied to secure a balance with the degree of advantage (the number of games in which the fixed RT state is shifted).

(3) Fixed RT state when winning a transition combination that causes a transition to fixed RT state (11th replay, etc.) is established even though no push order notification has occurred at the time of winning the transition replay It is good also as the structure which is not made to shift to. In addition, a penalty is given when a winning combination (11th replay, etc.) that causes a transition to the fixed RT state is won even though no notification of the pushing order has occurred at the time of winning the transition replay. may be configured. As a penalty, for example, over a predetermined number of games, the implementation of a transition lottery for AT mode or CZ mode, an additional lottery, etc. is restricted, the probability of winning is reduced, or the benefits at the time of winning (the number of games to be added or the mode to be shifted) ) is reduced.

(4) The bonus winning during the fixed RT state and the bonus winning during the infinite RT state may have different degrees of advantage during the carry-over state, such as different replay probabilities. Alternatively, the replay probability may be increased by making the bonus winning during the fixed RT state more advantageous than the bonus winning during the infinite RT state.

(5) Depending on whether a bonus is won during a high RT state or when a bonus is won during a low RT state, the degree of advantage during the carry-over state in which bonus winning is carried over may be made different, for example, the replay probability may be made different. Alternatively, the replay probability may be increased by making the bonus win during the high RT state more advantageous than the bonus win during the low RT state.

(6) Depending on the type of fixed RT state, bonus wins are carried over between a bonus win during a predetermined fixed RT state and a bonus win during another fixed RT state. The degree may be varied, for example, the replay probability may be varied, and the bonus winning during a predetermined fixed RT state is made more advantageous than the bonus winning during another fixed RT state. , the replay probability may be increased.

(7) When a transition replay is won, in addition to the 11th replay as a transition role to the fixed RT state, the 1st replay as a maintenance role that does not cause a transition to the RT state, and a fall role to the 1st RT state Although the second replay is configured to be repeatedly won, the configuration may be such that neither the sustaining combination nor the falling combination is included, or either one of them is included.

(8) Winning probabilities for transition replay may be other than those described in the above embodiments and modifications. For example, in the first embodiment, the winning probability is such that one win can be expected from when the shift notification flag is set to when the AT mode ends. The winning probability may be such that it is difficult or almost impossible to win from the time the AT mode ends. More specifically, for example, the winning probability of the transition replay is about 1/100, and the winning probability is about 1/10 in 10 games from when the notification flag for transition is set to when the AT mode ends. It may be an expected winning probability.

(9) Although the transition notification flag is set according to the number of remaining AT mode games (when 10 games remain), it may be set through a lottery or the like. For example, when 10 games remain, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to set the notification flag for transition, that is, whether or not to allow transition to the fixed RT state, and the lottery is won. may be configured to set the notification flag for transition.

(10) The transition notification flag may be set according to the AT mode game situation. For example, if the number of AT mode executions (continuation number) is less than a predetermined number of games (100 games), the shift notification flag is set or easily set when there are 10 games remaining, while the AT mode execution number (continuation number ) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the transition notification flag may not be set or may be difficult to set when 10 games remain. Also, if the number of won medals and the number of paid out medals in the AT mode is large, it is difficult or not to set the transition notification flag, and if the number of earned medals and the number of paid out medals is small, the transition notification flag may or may not be set. A simple configuration may be used.

(11) At the point of transition to the fixed RT state during the AT mode, the AT mode may be terminated, the notification of the order of pressing in the AT mode may be disabled, or the notification of the order of pressing may be less likely to occur.

(12) When the post-loading flag is set, even if the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value (10), the transition to the fixed RT state is prevented, but the post-loading flag is set. However, when the remaining number counter for display HG becomes 10, it may be configured such that the pressing order notification or the like is performed so that the transition to the fixed RT state occurs uniformly or partially by lottery.

(13) The effect at the start of the fixed RT state may be changed according to the number of games in the high RT state that can be completed in the transition to the fixed RT state. Also, the contents of the performance during the fixed RT state may be varied.

(14) The total replay probability may differ depending on the type of fixed RT state. In this case, from the point of view that the more the fixed RT state with a higher replay probability, the fewer medals are lost, the more the player moves to the fixed RT state with a higher replay probability, the more advantageous the player is. For example, if this configuration is applied to a configuration that shifts to the fixed RT state according to the excess of the advantageous section, the more the excess of the advantageous section, the higher the replay probability. It may be configured to shift to the fixed RT state. .

(15) After the bonus is finished, the game may be shifted to the fixed RT state without going through the normal game state. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which transition to another fixed RT state is allowed from the fixed RT state that transitions after the bonus ends. For example, the transition from the fixed RT state to the fixed RT state may be used to extend the high RT state after the end of the AT mode. In this case, in the previous fixed RT state, while allowing the transition to the later fixed RT state by using push order notification etc., if the bonus is won or the bonus ends in the beginning or middle of AT mode, A configuration may be adopted in which the transition from the previous fixed RT state to the subsequent fixed RT state is restricted using push order notification or the like.

(16) In the final stage of the AT mode, the transition to the fixed RT state is permitted, but the transition to the fixed RT state may be permitted from the beginning. For example, as a type of fixed RT state, a fixed RT state with a prescribed number of games such as 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, or 1800 games or 1200 games, which is close to the upper limit, is provided, and it is possible to transition to this fixed RT state. In the event that a transition combination to be played is won, regardless of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, it may be configured such that the pressing order is notified so that the transition occurs.

(17) Using the press order notification, it is configured to allow or restrict the transition to the fixed RT state when the transition replay is won, but the transition to the fixed RT state always occurs when the transition replay is won. may be configured.

(18) Depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 when winning the transition replay, the transition to the fixed RT state may or may not occur. It is sufficient if the transition to the RT state occurs or the transition does not occur. For example, when a predetermined reel is stopped at a predetermined timing, a predetermined stop result is obtained and the transition to the fixed RT state is performed. When the predetermined reel is stopped at a timing different from the predetermined timing, it may be configured such that a stop result different from the predetermined stop result does not occur and the transition to the fixed RT state does not occur. .

(19) If the game is played in the normal mode instead of the AT mode in the fixed RT state, the medal increase cannot be expected. However, the medal increase may be expected. It is preferable that the number of increased medals that can be expected when playing the game in the normal mode is smaller than the number of increased medals that can be expected when playing the game in the AT mode. In addition, when the game is played in the fixed RT state in the normal mode, medals are unlikely to be reduced. It is preferable that the number of tokens decreased when playing the game is smaller than the number of medals decreased when the game is played in the normal mode in the low RT state.

(20) In a configuration that secures the excess of the upper limit of the advantageous section in the normal mode and high RT state, secure the excess by using the specified number of games in the fixed RT state and the drop rate in the infinite RT state. Although an example has been shown, a configuration in which the fixed RT state and the infinite RT state coexist (a configuration in which transition to either state is possible) may be adopted. In addition, the player may be configured to select between the fixed RT state and the infinite RT state. A fixed RT state with a specified number and an infinite RT state with a falling rate of 1/50 may be selected. In addition, these configurations may be applied not only to the configuration of collateral for the excess of the upper limit of the advantageous section, but also to the configuration that intentionally extends the high RT state (for example, the first embodiment). .

(21) If the lottery for transition to AT mode is won during the fixed RT state, counting of the number of remaining AT mode games may be stopped in the low RT state when the fixed RT state ends. In this case, if the AT mode is shifted to the fixed RT state, and the number of remaining games is continued to be counted in the low RT state when the fixed RT state ends, the AT mode using the fixed RT state It is possible to secure the superiority of the continuous residence and the penalty when the AT mode is shifted to the fixed RT state due to an operation error or the like.

(22) If there is an excess of the advantageous section, in the configuration that allows transition to the fixed RT state, the selection rate of the type (number of games) of the fixed RT state that is allowed to transition depends on the set value A configuration in which there is a difference may also be used. By doing so, there is room for predicting the set value from the type of fixed RT state, and it is possible to use the prediction as collateral for the excess.

(23) Using the fixed RT state, even in a configuration in which the end game of the AT mode matches the end game of the high RT state, transition to a high-probability state in which the transition to the fixed RT state is likely to occur at the end of the AT mode. may be configured. That is, for example, when the 2nd RT state is a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win a transition replay, and the 3rd RT state is a high-probability state in which it is easy to win a transition replay, and the end of the AT mode is approaching (for example, when there are 20 games remaining). It may be configured to allow the transition from the 2nd RT state to the 3rd RT state (generate push order notification corresponding to the 4th and 5th regame wins when winning the 2nd promotion replay). In particular, the specified number of games in the fixed RT state for matching the end game of the AT mode and the end game of the high RT state tends to be short, and by doing so, it is possible to unintentionally shift to the fixed RT state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to events that cause

(24) In a configuration that matches the end game of the AT mode with the end game of the high RT state using the fixed RT state, the shorter the prescribed number of games in the fixed RT state, the presence of the additional notification due to the transition. It is preferable from the point of view of denying the However, the shorter the stipulated game is, the more likely it is that an event in which the transition to the fixed RT state cannot be caused occurs when the transition replay is not won, and in this case, the probability of winning the transition replay should be increased.

(25) In a configuration that uses the fixed RT state to match the end game of the AT mode with the end game of the high RT state, there is a fixed RT state transition hand that is the same number as the number of remaining games in the AT mode. If not, it may be configured to shift to a fixed RT state with a specified number close to the number of remaining games.

(26) In the fixed RT state, the AT mode additional winning probability is higher than in the infinite RT state, but the additional performance is such that the number of additional games at the time of winning tends to increase in the fixed RT state. may be configured to improve. In this case, the AT mode additional winning probability may be the same or the same.

(27) By increasing the probability of additional winning in AT mode in the fixed RT state, the balance with the denial of the existence of the additional notification due to the transition to the fixed RT state is ensured, but the fixed RT state is the player's For example, by moving to the fixed RT state, the rare image is set to be easier to see than before, or by moving to the fixed RT state, the determination and prediction of the set value It may be configured to be easier to perform.

(28) In the configuration in which the fixed RT state is set according to the execution status of the specific effect during the AT mode, the music played during the AT mode and the display effect have been described as examples, but the specific effect is the music and the display effect. is not limited to, and it may be a character action, a vibration performance by a speaker, or the like. In addition, the predetermined period as the execution period of the specific effect may differ depending on the type of the specific effect, or a plurality of predetermined periods of length are set for one specific effect. good too.

(29) The predetermined period of the specific effect is not limited to the period from the beginning to the end of the specific effect, and the specific effect may consist of a plurality of predetermined periods with breaks in between. More specifically, the specific effect is composed of a plurality of predetermined periods such as a first predetermined period, a second predetermined period, a third predetermined period, and so on from the start of the specific effect, and the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period, or the second predetermined period and the third predetermined period. It is preferable that the processes are clearly divided, and more preferably that the divisions are identifiable by the player.

(30) A high-probability state in which the transition to the fixed RT state is likely to occur (a state in which the transition replay winning probability is high, for example, the third RT state in the modification of the first embodiment), and a transition to the fixed RT state is unlikely to occur In a configuration in which a low-probability state (a state with a low transfer replay winning probability, for example, the second RT state in the modification of the first embodiment) is provided, the high-probability state is likely to transition to the fixed RT state, A configuration in which a transition to a low-probability state or a low-RT state is likely to occur may be adopted. More specifically, if the high-probability state is the 3rd RT state, increasing the probability of winning the BAR replay in the lottery table for the 3rd RT state increases the probability of transition to the 2nd RT state, thereby increasing the probability of winning the fall replay. increases the probability of transition to the low RT state. By increasing the probability of transitioning to a low-probability state like the former, the superiority of the high-probability state during AT mode can be increased, and by increasing the probability of transitioning to a low-RT state like the latter, the high-probability state When the AT mode ends in , and when the AT mode ends in the low-probability state, not only the ease of transition to the fixed RT state but also the ease of ending the infinite RT state (continuation of the transition period rate) can be made different.

(31) In a configuration in which the remaining period is determined from the predetermined period of the specific effect and the number of games that can be played in the remaining period is calculated, the length of the period required to execute one game is calculated as a fixed period (5 seconds). However, the length of time required to execute one game is not limited to the above. For example, the average value of the period required to execute one game from the games executed so far may be calculated and used to calculate the number of games that can be executed in the remaining period. By doing so, it is possible to end the high RT state at a good timing of the break of the specific effect for both the player whose game progress is fast and the player whose game progress is slow. Also, the period required for executing one game may be set according to the type of specific effect being executed, the number of times the specific effect has been executed so far, and the number of AT mode games that have been executed so far. If the type of specific effect is rare, the number of specific effects executed so far is small, or the number of games executed in AT mode is small, you can enjoy the specific effect that is being executed even at the end of AT mode (more fun). It is thought that the game is played while enjoying the game, and it is thought that the length of time required to execute one game can be lengthened.

(32) In the infinite RT state in the high RT state, when the second re-game winning is established as a fall re-game, it is configured to shift to the first RT state as a low RT state, and in the AT mode, the second re-game winning a prize. However, in situations where the conditions for falling to the first RT state are not met, such as when there are remaining AT mode games, Alternatively, even if the second regame win is established, the state may not be shifted to the first RT state. In addition, in the fixed RT state in the high RT state, the second re-game winning is prevented as a fall re-game, but although the second re-game winning is possible, even if the second re-game winning is established, the fixed RT state may be configured so as not to end.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, their modifications, and other embodiments, the invention described in the fixed RT state may be replaced with the infinite RT state and applied. The present invention may be applied by replacing it with the fixed RT state. In this case, when the prescribed number of games in the fixed RT state and the denominator of the winning probability of the fall replay in the infinite RT state are the same or about the same, the RT state is such that the same number of games can be executed. Also, the fixed RT state and the infinite RT state may coexist.

(33) The advantageous section may be defined as follows. A section in which at least one pushing order notification corresponding to the winning of the maximum number of payouts occurs. More specifically, in a push-order bell that can pay out 9, 3, or 0 medals depending on the stop order, the push-order notification that 9 medals will be paid out is generated at least once. interval. In addition, even if a transition to an advantageous section occurs, if the game ends only in the CZ mode, the configuration may include the case where the pressing order notification corresponding to the winning of the maximum number of payouts does not occur. That is, when the shift to the AT mode occurs, the push order notification corresponding to the winning of the maximum number of payouts is generated at least once. The configuration may be such that the process can end without any notification.

(34) In order to ensure that there is no difference in the probability or advantage of the lottery for transition to the AT mode or the like or the additional lottery depending on the setting value, the lottery is performed based on the lottery result with no particular difference in the setting. A lottery may be drawn based on a certain lottery result, but setting differences may be prevented by adjusting the benefits at the time of winning (the winning probability of a privilege, transition lottery, etc., and the number of additional games). For example, with setting 1, you will win with a probability of 1/100, and with setting 6, you will have a special role that you will win with a probability of 1/10. At setting 6, it is 1/20. By doing so, the total added winning probability becomes 1/200 regardless of the setting value, and the setting difference is eliminated.

(35) In order to prevent differences in the probabilities and advantages of the lottery for transition to the AT mode and the like and the additional lottery depending on the setting values, the lottery is performed based on the lottery results with no particular difference in the settings. These lotteries may be drawn based on a certain lottery result. In this case, depending on the setting value, there will be a difference in the probability and advantage of the lottery for transition to AT mode etc. Performance can also make a difference.

(36) Although the game in which the number of bets is 3 has been mainly described, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game in which the number of bets is 1 or a 2-bet game in which the number of bets is 2. For example, depending on whether the fixed RT state or the infinite RT state, a 1-bet game or a 2-bet game can be used (playable), but other bet numbers cannot be used (playable).

(37) The number of forcibly terminated games in the advantageous section is not limited to the above number (1500), and may be more or less.

(38) The conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section may include not only the completion of the upper limit number of games (1500), but also the upper limit number of payout medals (3000) in addition to or instead of that.

(39) The conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section may include not only the completion of the upper limit number of games (1500), but also the upper limit number of net additional medals (for example, 2400) in addition to or instead of that. Note that the number of net additional medals is the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts, and when the number of net additional medals reaches the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated. In this case, in each game in the advantageous section, it is determined whether the number of games played has reached the maximum number of games or the number of net increase medals has reached the maximum number of net increase medals. should be forcibly terminated.

(40) The add-on lottery table and the add-on game count lottery table are not limited to those described above, and the winning probability, the range and average of the add-on game number at the time of winning, etc. are arbitrary. For example, the number of games (eg, 2000 games) exceeding the upper limit number of the advantageous section may be selected as the number of additional games.

(41) Although the VB mode as a pseudo-bonus has been configured to be transitionable only during the AT mode, it may be configured to be transitionable even during the normal mode. In this case, when a lottery for switching to the VB mode is won, the winning game is set as the start game, and the display of the section indicator is started before the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. And it is sufficient. Also, in this case, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won at the same time as the VB mode, the starting game should be the game in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won.

(42) Small wins with medal payouts such as high cherry, low cherry, high watermelon, low watermelon, etc., and prizes with these high cherries, etc. Although specific replays having a common mode, and overlapping combinations of these small wins and specific replays and bonuses have been described as examples, the results that trigger the lottery are not limited to these results. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined bonus is performed alone, or a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed even in normal replays. Alternatively, a transition lottery or the like may be performed based on the number of games played or the cumulative number of points separately awarded based on each result. In any case, it is sufficient that the timing of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section or the like does not cause a difference in the probability of winning or the frequency of occurrence depending on the set value.

(43) Regarding the advantageous section, the probability of winning the transition lottery and the benefits at the time of winning (transition mode, number of additional games, etc.) are common regardless of the set value, but the probability of winning etc. differs depending on the set value. good too. In this case, depending on the type of result that triggers a lottery such as a transfer lottery, there are cases where there is a difference in the set value probabilities and prizes at the time of winning, and there are cases where there is no difference in the probability and prizes at the time of winning due to the set values. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(44) The number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is managed by the number of games AG in the advantageous interval. (until three replays are won in a row) may be set as one set, and the number of sets may be used for management. Specifically, in the AT mode, a predetermined number of games (50 games) is set as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery at the time of starting the AT mode or at the time of AT mode transition lottery. Then, the AT mode is terminated when the determined number of sets is consumed. In this case, when specific conditions such as winning a special role are established during AT mode, etc., an additional lottery for the number of sets will be performed as an additional lottery for AT mode. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the number of sets is added.

(45) When the push order bell or push order replay is won, the winning combination differs depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the benefits given are different, and the stop order is notified. Although the advantage for the player is made different depending on whether or not the stop operation is performed, any combination may be used as long as the advantage for the player is different by notifying the user of the stop operation.

For example, on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first pattern (for example, "black BAR" pattern) and the second pattern (for example, "red 7" pattern) cannot be aimed at the same time (at a position separated by five symbols or more). )Deploy. Then, the first symbol on the left reel 32L, the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (eg, "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol), and the predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (eg, "first replay" symbol or "Second replay" symbol) and stop on the activated line, the first result winning is established, and the second symbol on the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, "first replay" symbol or " 2nd replay symbol) and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (e.g., 1st replay symbol or 2nd replay symbol) stop on the activated line, so that the second result winning is established. A prize mode is set for the first result and the second result. In this case, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the first symbol when the first result is won, the first result prize can be established, but if the stop operation is performed aiming at the second symbol instead of the first symbol, the first result prize will not be awarded. It will not work and no corresponding benefits will be granted. Similarly, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the second symbol when the second result is won, the second result winning can be established, but if the stop operation is performed aiming at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result winning is not possible. It will not work and no corresponding benefits will be granted. On top of that, a special role is provided in which either the first result or the second result will be won, and when the special role is won, which one of the first result or the second result is won (first symbol and second result) Which of the two symbols should be targeted for the stop operation of the left reel 32L?). Also in such a configuration, it is possible to win the winning result (either the first result or the second result) by the notification, and the degree of advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. At least one of a mode in which such notification is likely to be performed, a mode in which the probability of transition to the mode in which the notification is likely to be performed is high, and a mode in which those who have won the lottery for transition to these modes are before transition. The advantageous interval may be a situation including the mode, or the advantageous interval may be a situation including at least one of the above modes, including each of the above modes and each mode based on the pushing order.

In other words, the stopping operation for differentiating the winning combination is not limited to the stopping order, and may be any stopping operation mode including the timing of the stopping operation. is not limited to notification of the pressing order, and may be notification of a mode related to an operation mode.

In addition, a plurality of winning combinations are set in the case of winning with a predetermined index value IV, and the winning combinations are differentiated according to the stop operation mode such as stop order and stop operation timing. You may do so. That is, when winning with a specific index value IV, it is assumed that the specific combination has been won, and the stop operation mode corresponding to the specific combination is determined by lottery after that, and the player's stop operation mode is determined by the stop operation. If it matches the lottery result of the mode, the special role winning is established, and if the stop operation mode of the player does not match the lottery result of the stop operation mode, the special role winning is not established, or The lottery for the game result and the lottery for the stop operation mode may be separate lotteries (two-step lottery), such as establishing different wins.

(46) A configuration may be adopted in which the pushing order notification is performed also in the CZ mode and the portent mode. More specifically, including AT mode, CZ mode, portent mode, etc., when the transition to the specific game state is also performed as an advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is until the press order notification occurs at least a predetermined number of times (once). A configuration that does not end may be adopted.

(47) The ball payout rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 has the highest ball payout rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(48) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(49) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 being the high ball entry state.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a re-game state (high RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined re-game result is higher than the normal game state (normal game state and first RT state, normal RT state, low RT state),
When a predetermined end condition (falling re-game winning, second re-game winning) is established, the first re-game state (second RT state, third RT state, infinite RT state) that can shift to the normal game state )When,
A second replay state in which a transition to the normal game state is made by executing a predetermined specific number of games, or a second replay state in which the predetermined termination condition is set to be less likely to be satisfied than in the first replay state. (Fixed RT state such as fourth RT state);
is set and
Modes of a plurality of stop modes including an operation mode of the stop operation means that makes it possible to prevent the predetermined end condition from being established (avoid winning of the second regame) in the first regame state. A mode reporting means (a function of executing the pushing process by the main control device 101) capable of performing reporting by a predetermined reporting means;
with
A low notification state (for example, normal mode) and a high notification state (for example, AT mode) are set so that the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification means is relatively high and low,
grasping means capable of grasping the number of remaining games in the first replay state in the high notification state (function for executing processing for grasping the number of AT mode continuations such as step S3202 in the fixed RT processing by the main controller 101); ,
In a specific situation where the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means is equal to or less than the specific number or equal to or less than the denominator of the probability of establishment of the predetermined end condition in the second re-game state, the second re-game state Allowing means for allowing the transition to (a function of setting a transition notification flag by the main controller 101 and a function of executing a process for notifying the pushing order such as the 11th regame winning at the time of winning the transition replay);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a first replay state in which a transition to a normal game state can be made when a predetermined end condition is satisfied; A second replay state is set in which a transition to a normal game state is made by executing a specific number of games, or a predetermined end condition is set to be less likely to be satisfied than in the first replay state. Since there is a case where a predetermined notification means may perform a mode notification including an operation mode that makes it possible not to satisfy a predetermined termination condition in the first replay state, the first replay state may be determined depending on whether or not the mode notification is present. The continuation of the replay state is managed. After that, the number of remaining games in the first replay state becomes equal to or less than a specific number, which is the number of continuations of the second replay state, or the number of remaining games in the first replay state reaches a predetermined end in the second replay state. When the specific situation becomes a value equal to or less than the denominator in the condition establishment probability, the transition from the first re-game state to the second re-game state is permitted. Therefore, it is possible to substantially extend the first replay state, in which the probability of replay results is high, by the amount of the second replay state. Therefore, it is possible to create new game features using the first replay state and the second replay state.

It should be noted that ``the specific situation in which the number of remaining games ascertained by the grasping means is equal to or less than the denominator of the probability of establishment of the predetermined end condition in the second replay state'' is more specifically can be expressed as a specific situation in which the value obtained by dividing by the number of remaining games ascertained by is equal to or greater than the probability that the predetermined termination condition is established in the second replay state. Such representation modifications are also applicable to other feature groups and other features.

Feature A2. In the normal situation, the number of remaining games ascertained by the ascertaining means in the first replay state is less than the specific number, or is greater than the denominator of the probability of establishment of the predetermined termination condition in the second replay state. , means for restricting the transition to the second replay state by the permitting means (executing a process for notifying the pressing order for the first regame winning when the transition replay by the main controller 101 is won) The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it has a function to play.

According to the above configuration, the transition to the second re-game state is prevented before the number of remaining games becomes equal to or less than a specific number or in a situation where the probability of establishment of the predetermined end condition in the second re-game state is greater than the denominator. . By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the event that the replay state ends without finishing the game that can be executed in the first replay state.

Feature A3. A condition determination means (function for determining whether or not the game lottery result by the main control device 101 is a transfer replay winning) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation,
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the permitting means permits the transition to the second replay state when the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, the replay state is not uniformly extended, but the replay state can be extended if the specific condition is satisfied, and is not extended if the specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability in which the player expects that the specific condition will be satisfied after the specific situation occurs, thereby increasing the feeling of excitement in the specific situation.

Feature A4. The characteristic A3 characterized in that the probability of establishment of the specific condition is equal to or higher than the probability obtained by dividing 1 by the specific number, or is equal to or higher than the probability of establishment of the predetermined termination condition in the second replay state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature A3, there is a specific situation in which the number of remaining games is equal to or less than a specific number, or the number of remaining games is equal to or less than the denominator of the probability of establishment of a predetermined end condition in the second replay state. After that, it is possible to enjoy the game in the specific situation assuming that the specific condition is generally satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to make the number of games to be continued in the first replay state substantially larger than the number of games in which the mode notification can be performed, and shift to the first replay state. You can greatly increase your expectations.

The above configuration can also be expressed as "the denominator of the establishment probability of the specific condition is equal to or less than the specific number, or the probability of establishment of the predetermined end condition in the second replay state is equal to or less than the denominator." It is possible.

Feature A5. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (11th re-game, 12th re-game), and the pattern combination for transition (11th re-game winning or 12th re-game winning) corresponding to the transition result (corresponding to ) is stopped at the effective position, the second replay state is entered,
The gaming machine according to feature A3 or feature A4, wherein the specific condition is that a result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win as a result of the shift.

According to the above configuration, success or failure of the specific condition is determined by a lottery executed based on the operation of the starting operation means. Therefore, since the player's operation intervenes in the success or failure of the specific condition, unlike the processing that proceeds only on the gaming machine side, the player tends to have the impression that the specific condition has been won by his/her own operation. Therefore, the operation of the starting operation means in a specific situation is performed with great effort, and the playability in that situation is greatly enhanced.

Feature A6. The predetermined end condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined end result (second replay), and the end pattern combination (for the second replay win) corresponding to the end result The first re-game state or the second re-game state can be shifted to the normal game state by stopping the corresponding rolled number) at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a result of overlap of the end result and the transition result, the stop operation means is operated in the operation mode for end, so that the pattern combination for end is placed at the effective position. The pattern combination for transition can be stopped at the effective position by operating the stop operation means in an operation mode for transition different from the operation mode for termination. The gaming machine according to feature A5.

According to the above configuration, when a duplicate result is won, either the first replay state ends or the second replay state can occur depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means in the game. Become. In this way, the overlap of the extreme results of happy events and unhappy events for the player stimulates the player's expectation for the double winning, and the operation mode when the double winning is won. attention can be preferably increased.

Feature A7. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined continuation result (first replay), and the continuation pattern combination corresponding to the continuation result stops at the valid position, so that the first regame state is entered. is a continuous configuration,
The transition result is a result that can be won in duplicate with the continuation result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a duplicate result of the continuation result and the transition result, the pattern combination for continuation is placed at the valid position by operating the stop operation means in the operation mode for continuation. The pattern combination for transition can be stopped at the effective position by operating the stop operation means in an operation mode for transition different from the operation mode for continuation. The gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6.

According to the above configuration, when a duplicate result is won, either the first replay state continues or the second replay state can occur depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means in the game. Become. In this way, the overlap of the extreme results of happy events and unhappy events for the player stimulates the player's expectation for the double winning, and the operation mode when the double winning is won. attention can be preferably increased.

In particular, when this configuration is applied to the feature A6, the end result, the continuation result, and the transition result overlap. Alternatively, since it will either shift to the second replay state, the degree of attention in the case of winning as a result of overlapping can be increased more favorably.

Feature A8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, the pattern combination for transfer can be stopped at the valid position by operating the stop operation means in the operation mode for transfer. ,
In the specific situation, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the transition result, the mode notification means can execute the specific mode notification as the mode notification related to the operation mode for transition by the predetermined notification means. The game machine according to any one of features A5 to A7, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, by following the mode notification by the mode notification means, it is possible to shift to the second re-game state in the specific situation and extend the re-game state. By doing so, it is possible not only to expect an increase in attention to the state notification, but also to make it possible to determine whether or not to extend the replay state by a relatively simple configuration such as whether or not to notify.

Feature A9. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined continuation result (first replay), and the continuation pattern combination corresponding to the continuation result stops at the valid position, so that the first regame state is entered. is a continuous configuration,
The transition result is a result that can be won in duplicate with the continuation result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a duplicate result of the continuation result and the transition result, the pattern combination for continuation is placed at the valid position by operating the stop operation means in the operation mode for continuation. It is possible to stop the pattern combination for transition at the effective position by operating the stop operation means in an operation mode for transition different from the operation mode for continuation,
When the lottery result by the lottery means overlaps the continuation result and the transition result, the mode notification means includes mode notification regarding the operation mode for continuation and mode notification regarding the operation mode for transition. Characteristic features A5 through A5 characterized by comprising a special means (in the display control device 81, the function of executing the process of performing the effect of FIG. 87(a)) capable of executing the mode notification by the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of A8.

According to the above configuration, when the continuation result and the transition result overlap, the specific mode notification including the mode notification regarding the operation mode for continuation and the mode notification regarding the operation mode for transition are sent by the predetermined notification means. Since it may be executed, it is possible to let the player choose whether to continue the first re-game state or transition to the second re-game state. By doing so, the player can determine whether to continue or shift, taking into account the timing of winning the duplicate result (the number of remaining games for which mode notification can be performed) and the number of games in the second replay state. It is possible to create new game characteristics such as.

Feature A10. After the notification by the special means is performed, the specific mode notification can be performed when the result including at least the transition result is won in the state in which the mode notification is executable. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, even if the player selects the continuation result winning based on the notification based on the overlapping result, if the transition result wins after that, it is possible to shift to the second re-game state. becomes. However, depending on the number of remaining games, there is a situation where it is difficult to win as a result of the transition, and on the premise of such a configuration, by selecting one of them as in feature A9, at what timing to transition to the second re-game state The game property judged by the player becomes more interesting.

Feature A11. The mode notification means can execute the mode notification even in the second re-game state, and when the first re-game state shifts to the second re-game state, the remaining game ascertained by the grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein numbers are inherited.

According to the above configuration, it is not the case that mode notification is not performed by shifting to the second re-game state, but the re-game state is extended by shifting to the second re-game state. The number of games in which mode notification can be executed does not necessarily increase, and only the merit of extending the replay state more purely can be enjoyed.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein in the second replay state, an increase in game media cannot be expected in a situation where the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second re-game state is used to extend the re-game state, it is possible not to increase the advantage too much. The significance of shifting to the second replay state instead of extending the is secured.
The predetermined end condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined end result (second replay), and the end pattern combination (for the second replay win) corresponding to the end result The first re-game state or the second re-game state can be shifted to the normal game state by stopping the corresponding rolled number) at the effective position,
Feature A13. Remaining number notification execution means capable of executing remaining number notification corresponding to the number of remaining games for which the mode notification can be executed by the mode notification means (executing notification based on the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81 function) and
addition processing execution means (function for executing AT mode game number addition processing by the main controller 101) for executing the addition processing in a state in which the mode notification can be executed by the mode notification means;
Based on the fact that the addition process is performed by the addition process execution means, addition notification means for performing addition notification of the addition process (function for executing processing for addition notification effect by display control device 81);
update means for updating the remaining number notification by the remaining number notification execution means based on the fact that the addition notification is performed by the addition notification means (function for executing processing for addition notification effect by the display control device 81); ,
When the remaining number notification by the remaining number notification execution means has notification contents corresponding to the specific situation, the addition processing by the addition processing execution means is executed and the addition notification by the addition notification means is not executed. If it is a certain second specific situation, specifying means for limiting that the transition to the second replay state is allowed by the allowing means (function of executing the processing of steps S3602 to S3603 by the main controller 101) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a so-called post-addition notification is made in which the addition processing is executed but the addition notification is not executed, even if the remaining number notification corresponds to the specific situation, the second Transition to replay state is not allowed. In this way, even though the actual number of remaining games in the first replay state is larger than the content of the remaining number notification, the event of shifting to the second replay state does not occur. can be made This is because, if a shift to the second replay state occurs in such a situation, the player may suffer a disadvantage because the game shifts to the normal game state by completing a specific number of games.

Feature A14. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (11th regame, 12th regame), it is configured to be able to transition to the second regame state,
In the specific situation, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the transition result, means capable of executing a predetermined special notification (process for generating push order notification by main controller 101 when transition replay wins) function) and
In the second specific situation, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the special notification or the special notification and the means that can execute the notification that the player cannot identify or is difficult to identify (by the main controller 101 A function to execute processing for generating push order notification when winning a transition replay);
The gaming machine according to feature A13, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the transition to the second re-gaming state can occur based on the transition result winning, in addition to the special notification occurring when the transition result is winning in a specific situation, Even in a specific situation, if a transition result is won, a special notice or a notice similar to it will be generated, so that the second specific situation will not occur, that is, the unexecuted portion of the addition process. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the presence of (post-loading notification) is recognized. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the effect of shifting to the second re-game state to the extent that the performance effect of the post-loading notification prepared with much effort is not lost.

Feature A15. Based on the number of remaining games ascertained by the ascertaining means, means (steps S5004 to S5020 by main controller 101) capable of shifting to the second replay state in which the number of remaining games is the specific number A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

According to the above configuration, by setting the second replay state in accordance with the number of remaining games for which mode notification is performed in the first replay state, the replay state can be ended with the remaining number of games. That is, if the first replay state remains, even after the number of remaining games for which mode notification is performed becomes 0, the replay state can continue until the pattern combination for ending is stopped. In order to prevent the rate from being too high and to ensure the fairness of the game, there is also a need to end the replay state in accordance with the number of remaining games in the mode notification. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to meet such needs, and to provide gaming machines that meet various needs.

Feature A16. When the transition to the second re-game state occurs by the means capable of transitioning to the second re-game state in which the number of remaining games is the specific number, the transition occurs more than before the transition occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A15, characterized in that it comprises means (additional lottery table in the third embodiment) that makes it more advantageous for the player to play after winning.

In a game feature in which an addition to a state in which mode notification is performed occurs, a so-called post-addition notification may be performed in which the addition is not notified until the final stage. By providing such a post-loading notification, an effect of making the game enjoyable until the final stage can be expected. In such a configuration, as described above, when the player shifts to the replay state in which the number of remaining games is the same, there is a possibility that the player may realize that there is no additional notification. Therefore, in the above configuration, by making it more advantageous than the previous state separately from the post-boarding notification, it is possible to replace the expectation for the post-boarding notification, and the number of remaining games can be varied. It is possible to provide enjoyment of the game while achieving the effect of ending the replay state.

Feature A17. If a transition to the second replay state occurs in a situation not permitted by the permitting means, it is possible to make the player more disadvantageous after the transition occurs than before the transition occurs. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, characterized by comprising means for:

According to the above configuration, if the state is not permitted by the permitting means and the second replay state happens to occur, an event disadvantageous to the player may occur. By doing so, while making the transition to the second replay state advantageous to the player, the advantage is taken advantage of, and the second replay state is intentionally made before the permission by the permitting means. It is possible to suppress the action of shifting to the game state.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that allows a prize to be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result that allows winning when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
A high-advantage state (advantageous section) and a low-advantage state (normal section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low are provided,
The mode notification means is configured to facilitate execution of the mode notification in the highly advantageous state,
Further, a plurality of replay states are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result is higher than in the normal game state and the number of executable games is different,
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of executable times of the high advantage state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (executing a process for adding the number of AT mode games by the main controller 101) function) and
When the number of games executed in the high-advantage state reaches a predetermined upper limit, the high-advantage state is terminated regardless of the number of executable times. function to perform processing) and
Remaining number grasping means for grasping the number of executable times when the high-advantage state is terminated by the upper limit termination means (function for executing processing for grasping the value of the excess counter by the main controller 101);
Selecting means for selecting one replay state from among the plurality of replay states based on the number of executable times ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means (fixed by main controller 101 in the second embodiment). a function to execute processing for RT);
Allowing means for allowing the transition to the replay state selected by the selecting means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101 in the second embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping operation mode of the revolving body, which is advantageous for the player. In the high-advantage state, the execution frequency of mode notification regarding the stop operation mode is high, so the degree of advantage of the high-advantage state and the low-advantage state can be set depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification.

In such game characteristics, there are cases where an increase process is performed in which the number of remaining executable times of the highly advantageous state is increased. On the other hand, when the number of games to be played reaches a predetermined upper limit, the high advantage state may end regardless of the number of executable games remaining. Soundness is guaranteed. However, if such an upper limit is set, in the event that the number of games that can be played exceeds the upper limit, it may give the impression that the corresponding number of games has been exploited, and the player's intention to play may be diminished. There is a possibility that it will be lost.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the upper limit is reached and the high advantage state is terminated, a replay state is selected based on the remaining number of executable times, and transition to the selected replay state is allowed. In the replay state, the probability of obtaining a replay result is higher than in the normal game state, so it is possible to play the game while reducing the decrease in game media as compared to the normal game state. In other words, an event unfavorable to the player, such as the disappearance of the number of games exceeding the upper limit in a high advantage state, is followed by an event favorable to the player, such as setting the replay state. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the intention to play is lost.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the selection means is capable of selecting a replay state in which a number of games close to the executable number of times can be executed from a plurality of the replay states.

According to the above configuration, it is more meaningful to ensure that the number of games exceeding the upper limit disappears by means of the replay state. In particular, depending on the aspect of the increase process, when the number of remaining executable times exceeds the upper limit, the type will increase infinitely. In the meantime, the number of types of replay states to be prepared will also increase in accordance with the increase in the types of executable times exceeding the upper limit. On the other hand, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the types of replay states to be prepared, and to reduce the limited storage capacity of the gaming machine.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the permitting means permits transition to the replay state selected by the selecting means before the high advantage state ends.

According to the above configuration, instead of shifting to the selected replay state after the end of the high advantage state, the transition is made before the end. By doing so, the game can be played without interruption between the high notification state and the selected replay state.

Feature B4. The mode notification can be executed up to the upper limit of the high-advantage state even when the replay state selected by the selection means is entered before the high-advantage state ends. The game machine according to feature B3.

According to the above configuration, by shifting to the replay state selected by the selection means, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to receive the benefit of the highly advantageous state of mode notification. By doing so, it is possible to maximize the merit of shifting to the replay state before the upper limit is reached.

Feature B5. The probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the regame result is the same in the predetermined re-game state that can be shifted by becoming the high advantage state and the re-game state selected by the selection means, or The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that they are approximately the same.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of the replay state, which is shifted according to the excess amount, is not increased too much, and the excess amount can be eliminated. In other words, if the replay state selected by the selection means has a higher probability of being a replay result than the predetermined replay state, the advantage of the replay state to be shifted according to the excess becomes too high. If a transition to a replay state selected by the selection means occurs in the midst of the high advantage state even though there is no excess, the advantage in the high advantage state increases dramatically. . On the other hand, if the replay state selected by the selection means has a lower probability of a replay result than the predetermined replay state, the significance of shifting to the replay state according to the excess amount becomes low, and the excess amount is reduced. It's hard to follow up on things that disappear. Therefore, by adopting the configuration described above, it is possible to achieve the effects of both sides without causing such inconveniences on both sides.

Feature B6. means for executing initialization processing of information relating to the mode notification (function for executing second section display processing by main controller 101) based on the termination of the high advantageous state by the upper limit termination means; ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the replay state selected by the selection means can be continued even when the initialization processing is performed.

According to the above configuration, when the high advantage state is terminated by the upper limit termination means, the replay state to be shifted to is not terminated even if the initialization processing is performed and can be continued thereafter. is clarified. By doing so, the effect of setting the replay state based on the amount exceeding the upper limit can be more clearly achieved.

Feature B7. As the replay state,
A first replay state (infinite RT state) that can end when a predetermined end condition (second replay win) is met;
a second replay state (fixed RT state) that ends when a predetermined number of games are played;
has
A plurality of second replay states with different numbers of executable games are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the selection means is capable of selecting one replay state from the second replay state.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration having the first replay state that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the second replay state that ends depending on the number of games played, when the high advantage state ends due to the upper limit. In addition, a transition to the second replay state is permitted. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for an event such as the replay state to end due to the fulfillment of the end condition to occur. It becomes possible to secure more suitably.

The "predetermined termination condition" is, for example, "that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined termination result" or "that the pattern combination for termination is stopped".

In addition, in the above configuration, the configuration for transitioning to the "second replay state" after having both the "second replay state" and the "first replay state" was shown. In the configuration having only the "game state", it may be configured to shift to the "second replay state".

Feature B8. As the replay state,
Having a first replay state (infinite RT state) that can end when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
A plurality of first re-game states having different probabilities of satisfying the predetermined end condition are set in the first re-game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the selection means is capable of selecting one replay state from the plurality of first replay states.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration having the first re-game state that ends when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the first re-game state has a different probability that the predetermined end condition is satisfied. When the state is shifted to the 1 replay state, the follow-up is thickened when the high advantageous state ends at the upper limit, and when the state is shifted to the easily established first re-game state, the follow-up is thinned. Moreover, with such a configuration, it is possible to provide a feeling of excitement as to when the transitioned replay state will end, and thus the game playability can be improved.

Feature B9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined end result, the predetermined end condition can be satisfied,
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the plurality of first replay states have different probabilities that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the end result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of first replay states with different probabilities of meeting the end condition with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature B10. The end result is included in the replay result,
The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein in the plurality of first re-game states, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-game result is the same or about the same.

According to the above configuration, since the probabilities of replay results in a plurality of first replay states are common, the difference between the plurality of first replay states is the probability of stopping the pattern combination for ending. can let In other words, if the probability of the replay result is different, depending on which first replay state the player transitions to, there will be a large difference in the degree of advantage, such as a difference in how game media are reduced, but a predetermined termination condition will be met. If the only difference is the probability of becoming ineligible, the significance of securing the excess will be made clearer.

Feature B11. The plurality of replay states are configured to shift when the corresponding pattern combination for transition stops at the valid position,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, the symbol combination for the first transition, which allows the transition to the first regame state among the plurality of the regame states, stops at the valid position. It is characterized in that the pattern combination for the second transition, which becomes possible and allows the transition to a second re-game state different from the first re-game state, can be stopped at the effective position. The game machine according to any one of B1 to B10.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration for shifting to one replay state out of a plurality of replay states, it is not the case that the game that can be shifted to is different, and one game can be shifted to a plurality of replay states. becomes possible. In this way, a game (lottery result) that allows a transition to the replay state selected by the selection means does not readily occur, making it difficult to transition to a desired replay state or to prevent the game from occurring. The number of games that can be executed in the replay state selected by the selection means and the number of times that the game can be executed exceeding the upper limit are less likely to deviate due to the number of games that can be played while waiting for a game that can be shifted. Therefore, the transition to the replay state selected by the selection means can be more reliably made, and the replay state selected by the selection means can be more consistent with the significance of shifting to the replay state. .

Feature B12. As the game results to be notified by the mode notification means, a payout result in which the privilege given by the privilege giving means is set as a predetermined number of game media and a replay result in which a replay is given are set. cage,
By entering the high advantage state, it is possible to shift to a predetermined replay state out of the replay state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein the selection means selects a replay state different from the predetermined replay state that becomes possible by entering the high advantage state. .

According to the above configuration, when a payout result or a replay result is reached due to the high advantage state, the mode notification is executed, and while the decrease in the game media is reduced by the replay result win, the game media are increased by the payout result win. It is possible to anticipate. In such a configuration, by setting the upper limit of the highly advantageous state, it is possible to take the excess into account and allow a shift to a replay state different from the replay state already shifted. In this way, if the replay state due to the high advantage state and the replay state due to the excess amount are set to be different, when the replay state is normally terminated when there is no excess amount, the excess amount side Therefore, it is not necessary to use a complicated configuration such as forcibly terminating the replay state in the middle.

Feature B13. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that allows a prize to be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result that allows winning when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
A high-advantage state (advantageous section) and a low-advantage state (normal section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low are provided,
The mode notification means is configured to facilitate execution of the mode notification in the highly advantageous state,
Further, a plurality of replay states are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result is higher than in the normal game state and the number of executable games is different,
An increasing means (main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining advantage, which is the advantage that the player can receive in the high advantage state, based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. A function to execute AT mode game number addition processing by),
Upper limit end means for ending the high-advantage state regardless of the remaining degree of advantage based on reaching a predetermined execution upper limit in the high-advantage state (executing the section display second processing by the main controller 101) function) and
Remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining advantage when the high advantageous state is terminated by the upper limit ending means (function for executing processing for grasping the value of the excess counter by the main control device 101);
Selecting means for selecting one of the plurality of re-gaming states based on the remaining degree grasped by the remaining number grasping means (fixed by main controller 101 in the second embodiment) a function to execute processing for RT);
Allowing means for allowing the transition to the replay state selected by the selecting means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101 in the second embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping operation mode of the revolving body, which is advantageous for the player. In the high-advantage state, the execution frequency of mode notification regarding the stop operation mode is high, so the degree of advantage of the high-advantage state and the low-advantage state can be set depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification.

In such game characteristics, there are cases where an increase process is performed in which the remaining advantage, which is the advantage that the player can receive in a high advantage state, is increased. expectations are rising. On the other hand, when the high-advantage state reaches the execution upper limit, it may end regardless of the remaining advantage, so the soundness of the game is ensured without increasing the advantage of the high-advantage state too much. However, if the upper limit is set in this way, if the remaining advantage exceeds the upper limit, it may give the impression that the advantage is exploited, and the player's willingness to play may be reduced. There is a possibility that it will be lost.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the upper limit is reached and the high advantage state is terminated, a replay state is selected based on the remaining advantage, and transition to the selected replay state is permitted. In the replay state, the probability of obtaining a replay result is higher than in the normal game state, so it is possible to play the game while reducing the decrease in game media as compared to the normal game state. In other words, an event unfavorable to the player, such as the disappearance of an advantage that exceeds the upper limit in a high-advantage state, is followed by an event favorable to the player, such as setting the replay state. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the intention to play is lost.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a re-game state (high RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined re-game result is higher than the normal game state (normal game state and first RT state, normal RT state, low RT state),
When a predetermined end condition (falling re-game winning, second re-game winning) is established, the first re-game state (second RT state, third RT state, infinite RT state) that can shift to the normal game state )When,
A second replay state in which a transition to the normal game state is made by executing a predetermined specific number of games, or a second replay state in which the predetermined termination condition is set to be less likely to be satisfied than in the first replay state. (Fixed RT state such as fourth RT state);
is set and
Modes of a plurality of stop modes including an operation mode of the stop operation means that makes it possible to prevent the predetermined end condition from being established (avoid winning of the second regame) in the first regame state. Notification is provided with a mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main control device 101) that can be executed by a predetermined notification means,
A low notification state (for example, normal mode) and a high notification state (for example, AT mode) are set so that the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification execution means is relatively high and low,
A configuration in which the high notification state is terminated and the low notification state is set when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that a transition to the second replay state is permitted in a specific situation (return section) from the end of the high notification state to the stop of the pattern combination for ending. .

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a first replay state in which a transition to a normal game state can be made when a predetermined end condition is satisfied; A second replay state is set in which a transition to a normal game state is made by executing a specific number of games, or a predetermined end condition is set to be less likely to be satisfied than in the first replay state. Since there is a case where a predetermined notification means may perform a mode notification including an operation mode that makes it possible not to satisfy a predetermined termination condition in the first replay state, the first replay state may be determined depending on whether or not the mode notification is present. The continuation of the replay state is managed. As for mode notification, there are a high notification state and a low notification state, but in the first replay state, after the high notification state ends, in a specific situation until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the second replay state is entered. migration is allowed. Therefore, if the specific situation shifts to the second replay state, the high notification state ends, but the replay state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to create new game features using the first replay state and the second replay state.

Feature C2. A predetermined pattern combination for the second transition stops at the effective position, thereby causing a transition to the second replay state,
The mode notification by the mode notification means includes a second mode notification regarding an operation mode that allows the pattern combination for the second transition to be stopped,
Execution of the second mode notification by the mode notification means is allowed in the high notification state, while execution of the second mode notification by the mode notification means is restricted in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the above configuration, in the high notification state, the second state notification that enables the stop of the pattern combination for the second transition is performed. It is possible to make it possible for the player to select whether to continue the first re-game state or to move to the second re-game state, or to make the transition to the second re-game state before the end of the high notification state , it is possible to extend the replay state. On the other hand, in the specific situation from the end of the high notification state to the establishment of the predetermined end condition, the execution of the second mode notification is restricted. It is necessary to use intuition so as to achieve an operation mode that allows the pattern combination for transition 2 to be stopped. In this way, the advantage of the mode notification will not be increased too much, and if the player succeeds in shifting to the second replay state in a specific situation, the player will have the impression that he or she won the game by his/her own intuition or operation. can be strongly given, and the playability can be greatly improved.

Feature C3. The second replay state is a second transition result in which the lottery result by the lottery means is predetermined, and the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result stops at the valid position. is the configuration to migrate,
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein a plurality of states having different probabilities that a result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the second transition result are set as the game state.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second replay state is entered when the pattern combination for the second transition is stopped in the game in which the winning result is the second transition result, there are a plurality of states with different probabilities of winning the second transition result. To realize a state in which a transition to a second replay state is easy or a state in which it is difficult to shift to the second replay state without depending on the execution frequency or the presence/absence of execution of a mode notification that makes it possible to stop the pattern combination for the second transition. can be done. In this way, if the configuration is such that the scene to be moved to the second replay state and the scene to be not moved to the second replay state can be realized simply by selectively using these states, it is possible to realize the designed gameplay with a simpler configuration. be able to. For example, if it is desired to shift to the second replay state in a specific situation, the high notification state may end in a state where winning is likely to occur as a result of the second transition, or the like, or without shifting to the high notification state. When shifting to the first replay state, it is possible to reduce the number of situations in which the transition to the second replay state occurs in a scene unintended by the designer, such as making it difficult to win as a result of the second transition.

Feature C4. As the replay state, the probability of winning the second transition result is relatively high and low (for example, the third RT state in the modification of the first embodiment) and the low probability state (for example, the first embodiment a second RT state in a modification of
Specific means for setting the game state to the high probability state before the specific condition is satisfied in the high notification state (function for executing processing for shifting to the transition mode in the modification of the first embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied and the high notification state ends, the high probability state is likely to occur. In this way, it is possible to make it easier to win the second transition result in the specific situation before the high notification state ends and the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the second replay state is entered in the specific situation. It can be made easier to transfer.

Feature C5. The high-probability state is a configuration in which a transition occurs when a predetermined high-probability transition pattern combination stops at the effective position,
The mode notification by the mode notification means includes a high-probability mode notification related to an operation mode that allows the high-probability transition pattern combination to be stopped,
The specifying means permits execution of the high-probability mode notification by the mode reporting means in the high reporting state, while restricting execution of the high-probability mode reporting by the mode reporting means in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the game state is set to the high-probability state before the termination condition is satisfied in the high-notification state.

According to the above configuration, in the high notification state, the high probability state notification is performed so that the pattern combination for the high probability transition can be stopped. Just do it. On the other hand, execution of the high-probability mode notification is restricted in a specific situation from the end of the high notification state until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied. In other words, in order to shift to the second replay state in the low notification state which is not the high notification state, the pattern combination for the high probability transition is luckily stopped and the high probability state is transitioned, and then the second transition result is won. Or, if the second transition result is won in a low probability state, and if it is possible to stop the pattern combination for the second transition fortunately, it is possible to shift to the second replay state. , the hurdles for shifting to the second replay state in the low notification state become high. By doing so, it becomes easier to realize the playability as designed, and it becomes possible to suppress the transition to the second replay state in a situation not intended by the designer.

Feature C6. The mode notification executing means enables the execution of the high-probability mode notification in a game after a specific game, which is a game before a predetermined number of games in which the specific condition is satisfied (the process of step S4105 by the main controller 101). The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, the high-probability mode notification can occur in the game after the specific game that is a predetermined number of times before the end condition of the high notification state is satisfied, and by operating according to the notification, It is possible to shift to a high probability state. In this way, if the state is shifted to the high probability state just before the high notification state ends, then the state is shifted to the second replay state to continue the replay state even after the high notification state ends, or After the end of the high notification state, it is possible to continue the replay state by shifting to the second replay state before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. In other words, by suppressing the event of shifting to the high probability state immediately after the high notification state is started and then shifting to the second replay state, the high notification state is normalized by the end of the second regame state It is possible to avoid being carried out in a game state.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the predetermined number is equal to or less than the specific number, or equal to or less than the denominator of the predetermined termination condition in the second replay state.

According to the above configuration, even if the game transitions to the second replay state immediately after transitioning to the high probability state, the replay state tends to continue longer than the end game in the high notification state. By doing so, the effect of the feature C6 can be favorably exhibited.

In order to obtain the effect of the above configuration more preferably, "the predetermined number is a number smaller than the specific number, or is less than the denominator of the predetermined end condition in the second replay state." is preferable.

Feature C8. As the game state, the probability of winning the second transition result is relatively high and low (for example, the second RT state in the modification of the first embodiment) and a low probability state (for example, in the first embodiment 3rd RT state in the modified example) and
The high notification state is likely to be executed in the first replay state as the low probability state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the transition to the low-probability state occurs via the high-probability state.

According to the above configuration, the first replay state in the high notification state becomes a low probability state that transitions through the high probability state, so it is possible to shift to the second replay state just before or after the end of the high notification state. Events become more limited. More specifically, for example, the normal game state transitions from the high probability state to the low probability state, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the low probability state, the normal game state can be transitioned to. In order to shift to the second replay state just before or after the notification state ends, it is necessary to shift to the normal game state once during the high notification state. That is, by intentionally shifting to the normal game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the high notification state, a period of high probability state is generated, and the probability of being able to shift to the second re-game state is increased. Therefore, the operation and route for shifting to the second replay state become more complicated, and by increasing the difficulty of the game, it is possible to motivate the player to challenge it.

Feature C9. The lottery results by the lottery means include advantageous results (first BB, second BB) that enable the player to transition to an advantageous state,
The result of the lottery by the lottery means is the advantageous result, and a transition to the advantageous state occurs when the usable pattern combination corresponding to the advantageous result stops at the effective position,
The information that the advantageous result is won is reserved until the useful pattern combination stops at the valid position,
The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein after the advantageous state ends, at least the high-probability state is followed by a transition to the low-probability state.

According to the above configuration, when a so-called bonus state as an advantageous state occurs during the high notification state, the game returns to the first replay state as a low probability state after passing through the high probability state. In this case, if the bonus state ends just before the high notification state ends, it is possible to shift to the second replay state instead of shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state. In other words, if such a configuration is used, the state immediately before or after the end of the high notification state becomes a high probability state, and the transition to the second replay state is likely to occur. can do. In the bonus state, it is common that a large amount of game media can be expected to be obtained, for example, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases regardless of the notification mode. It can be said that the advantage of the high notification state is eroded. In the bonus state in the high notification state, it is possible to stop the subtraction of the number of continuous games in the high notification state, but the high notification state is forcibly terminated by the upper limit number of games in the high notification state including the bonus state. There is also a configuration, and even from such a configuration, the bonus state in the high notification state is not preferable. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the transition to the bonus state occurs during the high notification state, so that the transition to the second re-game state can be performed to extend the re-game state. It is possible to make up for the partial erosion of the merits of the state.

Feature C10. As the game state, the probability of winning the second transition result is relatively high and low probability state (third RT state in the modification of the first embodiment) and low probability state (modification of the first embodiment a second RT state in
The predetermined end condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined end result, and in the case of the end result, the stop operation means stops the predetermined ending pattern combination. When operated in an operation mode that enables, the pattern combination for completion can be stopped at the effective position, and when the pattern combination for completion is stopped, the game state is shifted to the normal game state,
Furthermore, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined high probability result, when the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode that enables the high probability combination of symbols to be stopped, the effective position is reached. The high-probability picture combination can be stopped, and when the high-probability picture combination is stopped, the high-probability state is entered,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein overlapping results including the end result and the high-probability result are set as the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the ending pattern combination can be stopped, the high-probability pattern combination can be stopped depending on the operation mode. In other words, especially in a game in which the first replay state can end, it is possible to shift to the high probability state. In this way, by setting a game in which extreme events such as happy events and unhappy events can occur for the player, the playability of the game can be greatly enhanced, and the operation by the stop operation means in the game can be greatly improved. You can do it more carefully.

Feature C11. The predetermined end condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined end result, and in the case of the end result, the stop operation means stops the predetermined ending pattern combination. When operated in an operation mode that enables, the pattern combination for completion can be stopped at the effective position, and when the pattern combination for completion is stopped, the game state is shifted to the normal game state,
Further, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result and the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode that enables the stop of the pattern combination for the second transition, the valid The pattern combination for the second transition can be stopped at the position, and when the pattern combination for the second transition is stopped, the second replay state is entered,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein overlapping results including the end result and the second transition result are set as the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the pattern combination for ending can be stopped, the pattern combination for the second transition can be stopped depending on the operation mode. In other words, especially in a game in which the first replay state can end, it is possible to shift to the second replay state. In this way, by setting a game in which extreme events such as happy events and unhappy events can occur for the player, the playability of the game can be greatly enhanced, and the operation by the stop operation means in the game can be greatly improved. You can do it more carefully.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a re-game state (high RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined re-game result is higher than the normal game state (normal game state and first RT state, normal RT state, low RT state),
When a predetermined end condition (falling re-game winning, second re-game winning) is established, the first re-game state (second RT state, third RT state, infinite RT state) that can shift to the normal game state )When,
a second replay state (fixed RT state, such as a fourth RT state) that transitions to the normal game state by executing a predetermined specific number of games;
is set and
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that allows a prize to be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result that allows winning when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the notification state by the mode notification means, a low notification state (for example, normal mode) and a high notification state (for example, AT mode) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is relatively high and low are provided,
grasping means (function for executing the process of step S5003 by the main control device 101) capable of grasping the number of remaining games in which the high notification state can be executed;
When the high notification state is being executed in the first replay state, the identification means (main controller 101) for shifting to the second replay state, in which the number of games grasped by the grasping means is the specific number. A function to execute the processing of steps S5004 to S5020 by);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a first replay state in which a transition to a normal game state can be made when a predetermined end condition is satisfied; A second replay state in which a transition to a normal game state occurs when a specific number of games are executed is set, and the probability of a replay result is increased in both cases, thus reducing the amount of game media. The game can be progressed while restraining. Furthermore, the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, and the mode notification regarding the operation mode may be performed by the predetermined notification means. In addition to suppressing the number of game media, a game property that can be expected to increase the number of game media is realized.

In such playability, since the number of executable games can be extended or shortened in the first replay state between the first replay state and the second replay state, the length of the high notification state is increased. Assuming that it may be extended (so-called added), it can be said that the first replay state matches the high notification state. On the other hand, since the first replay state continues until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, if the replay state is to be terminated when the high notification state is terminated, It can be said that the second replay state in which the number of executable games does not change is preferable. Therefore, in this gaming machine, although it is basically assumed that the high notification state is executed in the first replay state, it is configured to shift to the second replay state depending on the number of remaining games in the high notification state. Therefore, while preventing the game property of the high notification state from deteriorating due to the expandability of the first replay state, the second regame state suppresses the event that the replay state continues endlessly even after the high notification state ends. can do.

Feature D2. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position, the transition to the second replay state is made. and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a specific pattern combination different from the pattern combination for the second transfer (stopped number for first replay winning) stops at the valid position. A configuration in which the first replay state is maintained,
The characteristic feature D1 is characterized in that the specifying means enables the specified combination of symbols to be stopped when the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means is different from the specific number in the second replay state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a transition to the second replay state occurs depending on the lottery result of each game, if the number of games in the second replay state and the number of remaining games in the high notification state do not match, The transition to the second replay state is postponed, and the first replay state is continued. By doing so, it is possible to avoid shifting to the second replay state that is different from the number of remaining games in the high notification state.

Feature D3. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position, the transition to the second replay state is made. and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a specific pattern combination different from the pattern combination for the second transfer (stopped number for first replay winning) stops at the valid position. A configuration in which the first replay state is maintained,
The specifying means can stop the specified combination of symbols when the number of remaining games ascertained by the ascertaining means is larger than the specified number in the second replay state. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a transition to the second replay state occurs depending on the lottery result of each game, if the number of games in the second replay state is smaller than the number of remaining games in the high notification state, The transition to the second replay state is postponed, and the first replay state is continued. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the event that the replay state ends before the end of the high notification state.

Feature D4. A plurality of second re-game states with different specific numbers are set as the second re-game state, and the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to each of the second re-game states stops at the valid position. By doing so, it is configured to shift to the second replay state corresponding to the stopped pattern combination,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the identifying means is capable of selecting a second replay state to be shifted to according to the grasp result of the grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the type of the second re-game state is selected according to the number of remaining games in the high notification state. However, it is possible to more preferably synchronize the end of the high notification state and the end of the replay state.

Feature D5. A high-advantage state (advantageous section) and a low-advantage state (normal section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low are provided,
The high-notification state is included in the high-advantage state,
Based on the fact that the number of games in the high advantage state has reached a predetermined upper limit number (1500), regardless of the number of remaining games, the upper limit end means for ending the high notification state (interval by main controller 101 function to execute display second processing),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the specifying means is capable of shifting to the second replay state in which the number of games up to the upper limit number is the specified number. .

By setting the upper limit of the number of high advantage states, it is possible to suppress the increase in the ball payout rate. It is possible to make the game machine more secure in meaning.

Feature D6. An addition processing execution means (a function of executing an AT mode game number addition processing by the main control unit 101) capable of executing the addition processing of the high notification state based on the establishment of a predetermined addition condition,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the additional condition is more likely to be satisfied in the second replay state than in the first replay state.

In a configuration in which additional information may occur in the high notification state, so-called subsequent information may be set such that additional information is performed just before the end of the high information state. By playing the game on the premise that there is a case where the post-loading notification is set, there is an advantage that the player can enjoy the high notification state to the end. On the other hand, as in the above feature D1, if it is configured to shift to the second re-game state according to the number of remaining games in the high notification state, the transition to the second re-game state will cause the post-addition notification of the high notification state. does not exist, that is, it is clearly understood that the high notification state will end after a few games. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by facilitating the fulfillment of the add-on condition in the second re-gaming state, it is understood that there is no post-adding notification due to the transition to the second re-gaming state. , and the enjoyment of connecting hopes to the last chance so as to generate extra rewards in the second replay state is realized. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the game.

Feature D7. Means (display in the third embodiment) capable of notifying the transition to that effect and notifying the number of games that can be executed in the second re-gaming state when the transition to the second re-gaming state occurs. A feature D6 characterized in that the control device 81 has a function of executing processing for displaying identification information for adding result notification and characters corresponding to the fixed number of RT games on the auxiliary display unit 65. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to clearly grasp the transition to the second replay state in which the additional condition is likely to be satisfied, and the number of games played. A player who does not want the high notification state to end may not want the transition to the second replay state as much as possible, but as described above, the second replay state is a state in which the additional condition is likely to be satisfied. Therefore, there is also an idea that the player should move to the second replay state as soon as possible, that is, with as many games as possible. The above configuration respects the latter idea more, and by performing the above notification, at the final stage of the high notification state, whether the high notification state ends or the high notification state continues, Such intense thrilling playability is realized.

Feature D8. When the add-on condition is established in the second re-game state, after the shift to the normal game state occurs, when the shift to the first re-game state occurs, a notification corresponding to the add-on process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature D6 or feature D7, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing a process of restarting the AT mode for the number of games corresponding to the latency counter by the main controller 101). .

According to the above configuration, on the premise of the configuration using the second re-game state in which the transition to the normal game state is performed by executing a specific number of games, the high notification state is activated during the second re-game state. When the add-on condition is established, after the normal game state is shifted once, notification corresponding to the add-on processing is performed based on the occurrence of the shift to the first re-game state. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the unnatural feeling of being notified of the addition even though the end is imminent. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural that the replay state ends immediately after the addition has been notified.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. As game states, it has a first advantageous state (high RT state) that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
A specific effect (for example, music in AT mode) is set to be executed for a predetermined period in a specific situation (AT mode, ART state of high RT state) that is at least the second advantageous state,
grasping means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5201 and S5202 by the display control device 81) capable of grasping the remaining period of the specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined grasping condition in the specific situation; ,
setting means (function for executing the process of step S5205 by the display control device 81) for setting the period of the first advantageous state according to the remaining period grasped by the grasping means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a specific situation in which there are at least two advantageous states, the period of the first advantageous state is set according to the remaining period of the specific effect. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the specific effect that occurs in the specific situation is terminated halfway along with the end of the specific situation. In this case, if the second advantageous state is extended, there is a possibility that inconvenience may occur such as the advantage being too high. It is also conceivable to simply continue the specific effect even after the end of the specific situation, but in this case, the simple effect that has nothing to do with the degree of advantage will continue, and on the contrary, it may end up disappointing. . Therefore, the first advantageous state, which is advantageous to the player but is more disadvantageous than the second advantageous state, is set so as to match the remaining period of the specific effect. It is possible to fully enjoy the specific performance without having to let it go.

Feature E2. The game according to feature E1, characterized in that after the second advantageous state in the specific situation ends, the specific effect can be continued in the first advantageous state set by the setting means. machine.

According to the above configuration, in a specific situation in which there are at least two advantageous states, a period of the first advantageous state is set according to the remaining period of the specific effect, and during that period, even if the second advantageous period ends. The specific production continues. By doing so, the effect of the feature E1 can be more favorably exhibited.

Feature E3. In the specific situation, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state may overlap,
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the setting means can set the end of the first advantageous state according to the remaining period grasped by the grasping means.

According to the above configuration, since the end of the first advantageous state is set according to the remaining period of the specific effect, after the end of the second advantageous state, the timing at which the first advantageous state ends and the timing at which the specific effect ends. will match. Therefore, it is possible to produce the best finale in a specific situation such that the specific production ends at the same time as the advantageous state ends.

Feature E4. A plurality of periods with different lengths are set as the predetermined period of the specific effect,
The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the grasping means grasps the predetermined period when the grasping condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, the specific effect can be diversified, and the significance of grasping each time by the grasping means when the grasping condition is established is ensured. In other words, if the predetermined period is uniform, it is possible to set the end timing of the predetermined period to coincide with the end timing of the specific situation (second advantageous state) from some time in advance, such as the start of the predetermined period. However, if there are multiple types of periods, the configuration for setting them to match in advance may become complicated, or it may not be possible to match. In this respect, as described above, if it is configured to grasp each time, while the specific effects are diversified, it is possible to favorably achieve the effect of making the specific effects enjoyable until the end.

Feature E5. The first advantageous state can be executed over a predetermined specific number of games,
The setting means calculates the number of games required in the remaining period from the remaining period ascertained by the ascertaining means, and sets the first advantageous state so that the specific number is equal to the calculated number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that it is possible.

According to the above configuration, the number of games corresponding to the remaining period is set by using the first advantageous state that can be executed over a specific number of times, and the first advantageous state is set for the number of games corresponding to the remaining period of the specific effect. A specific configuration for setting the first advantageous state is clarified.

Feature E6. The specific effect includes a effect in which a predetermined number of games are played for the predetermined period of time,
The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics E1 to E5, wherein the grasping means can grasp the predetermined number of remaining games as the remaining period of the predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, if the specific effect is executed over a predetermined number of games, it is easy to grasp the number of remaining games, and furthermore, the second advantageous state is set according to the number of remaining games. It also becomes easier. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature E1 with a simple configuration, and it is possible to make it easier to end the specific situation while associating the specific effect with the advantageous state.

Feature E7. Upper limit end means for ending the first advantageous state based on the fact that the number of games that can be executed in the specific situation reaches a predetermined upper limit number (1500). function),
Any of features E1 to E6, wherein the specific effect is a effect that is started from a game before reaching the upper limit number when the first advantageous state is terminated by the upper limit end means. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the upper limit of the specific situation is defined, the specific effect is, so to speak, the ending effect. Such an ending effect is defined as a game that reaches the upper limit number at the end, but the beginning is a game before reaching the upper limit number, but the number of games from the start of the specific situation is at the start It is a production that is not determined, but is started based on a start condition that is established after the fact. In that case, it may be difficult to end the first advantageous state when the ending effect ends. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature E1 to such a gaming machine, the advantageous state can be ended in accordance with the ending effect, and the function as the ending effect can be exhibited more favorably.

Feature E8. End effect execution means (function for executing AT mode end effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the end effect of the specific situation when the specific situation ends;
When the period of the first advantageous state is set by the setting means, means for executing the end effect by the end effect executing means in correspondence with the end of the first advantageous state (step by the display control device 81 function to execute the processing of S5303);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first advantageous state is set in accordance with the end of the specific effect, the end effect is also postponed. By doing so, the player who wants to grasp the content of the specific situation (the number of game media obtained, etc.) from the end production will have the advantage of enjoying the specific production to the end, and the impression that the specific situation has been extended. can also be given.

Feature E9. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that allows a prize to be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result that allows winning when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the notification state by the mode notification means, a low notification state (for example, normal mode) and a high notification state (for example, AT mode) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is relatively high and low are provided,
Furthermore, a replay state is provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result is higher than in the normal game state,
The first advantageous state is the replay state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the second advantageous state is the high notification state.

In the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is drawn by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the stop result is obtained. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the number corresponds to the result of the lottery, the replay state in which the probability of replaying results is higher than that in the normal game state is the first advantageous state, The second advantageous state is the high notification state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode is high. By applying the configuration of the feature E1 to such a slot machine having such a playability, a specific effect executed in a specific situation including a high notification state is set to a replay state without extending the high notification state. By doing so, the effect of entertaining the specific performance to the end can be enhanced, and the performance effect of the specific situation including the high notification state can be favorably exhibited without excessively increasing the advantage of the high notification state.

Feature E10. As the replay state,
A first replay state (second RT state, third RT state, infinite RT state) that can shift to the normal game state by satisfying a predetermined termination condition;
a second replay state (fixed RT state, such as a fourth RT state) that transitions to the normal game state by executing a predetermined specific number of games;
is set and
The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the setting means can set the second replay state to be the specific number corresponding to the remaining period.

According to the above configuration, a first replay state in which a transition to a normal game state is possible when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and a second regame state in which a transition to a normal game state is performed when a specific number of games are played. and are set, the second replay state is used to correspond to the remaining period of the specific effect. If the first replay state is used, the replay state and the specific effect will eventually be separated from each other through the fact that the end condition is not met despite the fact that it has been set in association with the remaining period of the specific effect. This is because the result may be that there is no correspondence.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group E to each configuration of feature group A to feature group E detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, and that the last stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

10... Slot machine as game machine 32... Reel as revolving body 41... Start lever as start operation means 42 to 44... Stop switch as stop operation means 64... Speaker constituting auxiliary effect section 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that allows a prize to be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result that allows winning when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a manner notification means capable of executing a manner notification regarding the operation manner including the first stop operation manner and the second stop operation manner by a predetermined notification means,
providing a normal mode and a specific mode in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is easier to execute than in the normal mode ,
Further, a first special state and a second special state are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will result in a predetermined replay result is higher than in the normal game state and the number of executable games is different,
means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of the specific mode based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
terminating means for terminating the specific mode when a predetermined condition for forced termination is satisfied in the specific mode ;
a remaining number grasping means for grasping information corresponding to the remaining number when the specific mode is ended by the ending means;
means capable of shifting to the first special state when the information grasped by the remaining quantity grasping means is the first information;
means capable of shifting to the second special state when the information grasped by the remaining number grasping means is second information different from the first information;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images